XDM-100 IOM SDH A00 4-5 en

XDM-100
Installation, Operation and

Maintenance Manual
V 4.5
417006-2301-0H3-A00
Printed on 21 December, 2004

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual
V 4.5
Catalog No: X33921
December 2004
nd
2 Edition
Copyright by ECI Telecom, 2003-2004. All rights reserved worldwide.

This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and ECI Telecom Ltd. (ECI Telecom). BY OPENING THE
DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS
AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE
UNOPENED DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS (INCLUDING
WRITTEN MATERIALS AND BINDERS OR OTHER CONTAINERS), TO THE PLACE YOU OBTAINED THEM.
The information contained in the documentation and/or disk is proprietary and is subject to all relevant copyright,
patent and other laws protecting intellectual property, as well as any specific agreement protecting ECI Telecom's
rights in the aforesaid information. Neither this document nor the information contained in the documentation and/or
disk may be published, reproduced or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part, without the express, prior
written permission of ECI Telecom. In addition, any use of this document, the documentation and/or the disk, or the
information contained therein for any purposes other than those for which it was disclosed is strictly forbidden.
ECI Telecom reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in equipment design or
specifications. Information supplied by ECI Telecom is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no
responsibility whatsoever is assumed by ECI Telecom for the use thereof, nor for the rights of third parties, which
may be affected in any way by the use and/or dissemination thereof.
Any representation(s) in the documentation and/or disk concerning performance of ECI Telecom's product(s) are
for informational purposes only and are not warranties of product performance or otherwise,, either express or
implied. ECI Telecom's standard limited warranty, stated in its sales contract or order confirmation form, is the only
warranty offered by ECI Telecom.
The documentation and/or disk is provided AS IS and may contain flaws, omissions or typesetting errors. No
warranty is granted nor liability assumed in relation thereto unless specifically undertaken in ECI Telecom's sales
contract or order confirmation. Information contained in the documentation and in the disk is periodically updated,
and changes will be incorporated into subsequent editions. If you have encountered an error, please notify ECI
Telecom. All specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
The documentation and/or disk and all information contained therein is owned by ECI Telecom and is protected by
all relevant copyright, patent and other applicable laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must
treat the information contained in the documentation and disk as any other copyrighted material (e.g., a book or
musical recording).
Other Restrictions. You may not rent, lease, sell or otherwise dispose of the documentation and disk, as applicable.
YOU MAY NOT USE, COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK OR ANY COPY
IN WHOLE OR PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE. ALL RIGHTS NOT EXPRESSLY
GRANTED ARE RESERVED BY ECI TELECOM.
All trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective holders.
ECI Telecom shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage whatsoever or howsoever
caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with this documentation and/or disk, the information contained
therein, its use or otherwise. Notwithstanding the generality of the aforementioned, you expressly waive any claim
and/or demand regarding liability for indirect, special, incidental or consequential loss or damage which may arise
in respect of the documentation and/or disk and/or the information contained therein howsoever caused even if
advised of the possibility of such damages.
Contents
About this Manual......................................................................... xv
Overview ............................................................................................................ xv
Intended Audience ............................................................................................. xv
Documentation Conventions ............................................................................. xvi
Related Documentation..................................................................................... xvi
Obtaining Technical Assistance ....................................................................... xvii
Documentation Feedback ................................................................................ xvii
Your Opinion Is Very Important To Us .............................................................xviii
1 Introduction.............................................................................. 1-1
The XDM-100 Concept..................................................................................... 1-2
XDM-100 Platform Overview............................................................................ 1-3
XDM-100 Platform Options .............................................................................. 1-4
2 Before You Start ...................................................................... 2-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 2-1
Outline of Installation Procedure ...................................................................... 2-1
Site Preparation................................................................................................ 2-3
Tools and Test Equipment ............................................................................... 2-5
Installing the XDM-100 in Racks ...................................................................... 2-7
Preparing Cables and Fibers.......................................................................... 2-13
Work and Equipment Safety........................................................................... 2-19
Protection against ESD .................................................................................. 2-28
3 Equipment Installation ............................................................ 3-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-2
Unpacking and Visual Inspection ..................................................................... 3-7
Installation Options........................................................................................... 3-8
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks................................................................... 3-12
Installing the Air Filter..................................................................................... 3-42
Installing the Shelf in the Rack ....................................................................... 3-45
Grounding the XDM-100 Shelf ....................................................................... 3-46
Installing XDM-100 Cards .............................................................................. 3-48
Installing XDM-100 Modules .......................................................................... 3-53
Installing TPU Modules .................................................................................. 3-63
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the XDM-100 in ETSI A Racks.................. 3-69
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the XDM-100 in ETSI B Racks.................. 3-81
Installing a TPU on the XDM-100 Shelf.......................................................... 3-84
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary i

Contents XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
4 Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 4-1

Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-2
Test Equipment ................................................................................................ 4-3
Site Commissioning Tests................................................................................ 4-3
SDH Commissioning Tests .............................................................................. 4-7
IOP Hardware Protection Test ....................................................................... 4-14
Severity Assignment Test............................................................................... 4-15
Transmission Alarm Handling Tests............................................................... 4-15
Maintenance Actions Tests ............................................................................ 4-16
MXC Redundancy Test .................................................................................. 4-16
Cisco ATA 186/Cisco2600/CallManager Test ................................................ 4-17
Data Network Commissioning Tests .............................................................. 4-17
Optical Network Commissioning Tests........................................................... 4-20
5 Maintenance............................................................................. 5-1
Overview .......................................................................................................... 5-1
Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials .............................................. 5-1
Preventive Maintenance................................................................................... 5-2
Traffic Monitoring System................................................................................. 5-6
Onsite Troubleshooting .................................................................................. 5-12
Replacing Cards and Modules ....................................................................... 5-22
Replacing xRAP/xRAP-100 Components ...................................................... 5-31
A Equipment Description .......................................................... A-1

Shelf Overview ................................................................................................. A-2
Fan Control Unit (FCU) .................................................................................... A-2
External Connection Unit (ECU)....................................................................... A-5
Main Cross-Connect and Control (MXC) Card Options ................................... A-9
SDH Aggregate Modules (SAM) .................................................................... A-14
I/O Modules .................................................................................................... A-20
EISM I/O Modules .......................................................................................... A-29
Tributary Protection Unit (TPU) ...................................................................... A-33
Accessories for Rack Installation ................................................................... A-39
Cables ............................................................................................................ A-51
B XDM-100H................................................................................ B-1
Overview .......................................................................................................... B-1
XDM-100H Description..................................................................................... B-2
XDM-100H Configuration Options.................................................................... B-3
I/O Modules ...................................................................................................... B-7
TPU/OCU Shelf .............................................................................................. B-11
CWDM Networking Modules .......................................................................... B-11
Installing the TPU/OCU .................................................................................. B-21
ii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Contents
Maintenance Manual
C Connection Data ..................................................................... C-1

Overview ..........................................................................................................C-2
MXC-100 DC Input Power Connectors ............................................................C-3
ECU/ECU-F Card Connectors..........................................................................C-3
PIM2_21 Module Connection Data ................................................................C-13
PIM2_63 Module Connection Data ................................................................C-17
EISM Connectors ...........................................................................................C-21
xRAP Connectors...........................................................................................C-21
xRAP-100 Connectors....................................................................................C-27
D Rack Installation ..................................................................... D-1

Installing XDM-100 Equipment Racks..............................................................D-1
European 19 Rack Installation ........................................................................D-7
E Frequencies and Wavelengths ...............................................E-1

Table of Frequencies and Wavelengths........................................................... E-1
6 Index .......................................................................................... I-1
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary iii

Contents XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
iv ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

Table of Figures
Figure 1-1: XDM-100 shelf ............................................................................................. 1-3
Figure 2-1: ETSI A rack.................................................................................................. 2-9
Figure 2-2: Typical installation in an ETSI A rack ........................................................ 2-12
Figure 2-3: Grounding strip .......................................................................................... 2-22
Figure 2-4: Basic ESD warning symbol ....................................................................... 2-28
Figure 2-5: Typical temporary EPA arrangement ........................................................ 2-30
Figure 3-1: Components of installation .......................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3-2: Typical installation in an ETSI A rack .......................................................... 3-9
Figure 3-3: Typical installation in an ETSI B rack ........................................................ 3-10
Figure 3-4: Typical installation of three shelves in an ETSI A rack.............................. 3-11
Figure 3-5: Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud....................................................... 3-15
Figure 3-6: Identification of xRAP-100 cable routes .................................................... 3-16
Figure 3-7: Connecting DC power cables to the xRAP-100 ........................................ 3-16
Figure 3-8: xRAP slide switches .................................................................................. 3-24
Figure 3-9: Location of xRAP grounding stud .............................................................. 3-27
Figure 3-10: Identification of xRAP cable routes.......................................................... 3-27
Figure 3-11: Connecting DC power cables to the xRAP.............................................. 3-28
Figure 3-12: xRAP circuit breakers installation ............................................................ 3-30
Figure 3-13: xRAP-100 shelf DC input power connectors, pin functions..................... 3-31
Figure 3-14: Cable guide.............................................................................................. 3-32
Figure 3-15: Fiber guide for ETSI A racks ................................................................... 3-33
Figure 3-16: Fiber guide for ETSI B racks ................................................................... 3-33
Figure 3-17: Guiding rod installation ............................................................................ 3-34
Figure 3-18: Threading optical fibers in the FST.......................................................... 3-36
Figure 3-19: Attaching rack mount brackets to the ODF ............................................. 3-37
Figure 3-20: ODF front panel ....................................................................................... 3-37
Figure 3-21: ODF open view ........................................................................................ 3-38
Figure 3-22: ODF fiber routes ...................................................................................... 3-38
Figure 3-23: Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP ............................... 3-41
Figure 3-24: Removing the mounting bracket.............................................................. 3-42
Figure 3-25: Installing the filter frame .......................................................................... 3-43
Figure 3-26: Installing the air filter................................................................................ 3-44
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary v

Table of Figures XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Figure 3-27: Installed air filter....................................................................................... 3-45

Figure 3-28: Shelf and rack grounding......................................................................... 3-47
Figure 3-29: Installing the FCU .................................................................................... 3-48
Figure 3-30: Installing the ECU .................................................................................... 3-49
Figure 3-31: Installing the MXC-100 ............................................................................ 3-50
Figure 3-32: Location of aggregate module slots......................................................... 3-54
Figure 3-33: Installing an aggregate module in the MXC-100 ..................................... 3-55
Figure 3-34: Inserting an I/O module in the I/O modules cage .................................... 3-57
Figure 3-35: Inserting an SFP transceiver into an I/O module..................................... 3-59
Figure 3-36: Installation of typical double-slot modules in the shelf ............................ 3-60
Figure 3-37: Removing the module guide (lower row) ................................................. 3-61
Figure 3-38: Removing the black anodized metal part from the upper module guide . 3-61
Figure 3-39: Removing the module guide (upper row) ................................................ 3-62
Figure 3-40: Inserting the TC module .......................................................................... 3-64
Figure 3-41: Inserting a single-slot TPM in the TPU .................................................... 3-65
Figure 3-42: Inserting a double-slot TPM in the TPU................................................... 3-66
Figure 3-43: Removing a TPM guide ........................................................................... 3-67
Figure 3-44: Routing of cables and optical fibers in an ETSI A rack ........................... 3-69
Figure 3-45: TPM2_3 to PIM2_21 protection configuration ......................................... 3-75
Figure 3-46: Connecting to a TPM-H_1 protection module ......................................... 3-76
Figure 3-47: Routing cables and optical fibers in an ETSI B rack ............................... 3-81
Figure 3-48: Removing the TPU connector cover from the shelf................................. 3-85
Figure 3-49: Inserting the TPU connector onto the shelf ............................................. 3-85
Figure 3-50: Lowering the TPU onto the shelf ............................................................. 3-86
Figure 3-51: Securing the TPU onto the shelf.............................................................. 3-86
Figure 4-1: Optical commissioning tests setup ............................................................ 4-21
Figure 5-1: Installing the air filter.................................................................................... 5-5
Figure 5-2: ECU-F monitoring system interface............................................................. 5-6
Figure 5-3: Monitoring system interface of a typical module ......................................... 5-7
Figure 5-4: Inserting an SFP transceiver into an I/O module....................................... 5-29
Figure 5-5: Replacing the xRAP circuit breakers ......................................................... 5-31
Figure 5-6: Replacing the xRAP-100 circuit breakers.................................................. 5-33
Figure A-1: Basic shelf ...................................................................................................A-2
Figure A-2: FCU, general view.......................................................................................A-3
Figure A-3: Installed air filter ..........................................................................................A-4
vi ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Table of Figures
Maintenance Manual
Figure A-4: ECU-F front panel .......................................................................................A-6

Figure A-5: ECU front panel...........................................................................................A-8
Figure A-6: Shelf with MXC-100 redundancy.................................................................A-9
Figure A-7: Shelf without MXC-100 redundancy..........................................................A-10
Figure A-8: MXC-100 front panel ................................................................................A-11
Figure A-9: Shelf with MXC redundancy......................................................................A-12
Figure A-10: Shelf without MXC redundancy...............................................................A-14
Figure A-11: SAM1_4/E aggregate module .................................................................A-15
Figure A-12: SAM1_4/O aggregate module.................................................................A-16
Figure A-13: SAM4_2 aggregate module ....................................................................A-17
Figure A-14: SAM16_1 aggregate module ..................................................................A-18
Figure A-15: SAM1_4/OE aggregate module ..............................................................A-19
Figure A-16: PIM2_21 I/O module ...............................................................................A-22
Figure A-17: PIM2_63 module .....................................................................................A-23
Figure A-18: PIM345_3 I/O module .............................................................................A-24
Figure A-19: SIM1_4/E I/O module ..............................................................................A-25
Figure A-20: SIM 1_4/O I/O module ............................................................................A-26
Figure A-21: SIM4_2 I/O module .................................................................................A-27
Figure A-22: SIM1_4/OE I/O module ...........................................................................A-28
Figure A-23: EISM_208 I/O module.............................................................................A-29
Figure A-26: Shelf with TPU.........................................................................................A-34
Figure A-27: TC module...............................................................................................A-35
Figure A-28: TPM2_3 protection module .....................................................................A-37
Figure A-29: TPMH_1 protection module ....................................................................A-38
Figure A-30: xRAP-100 front panel ..............................................................................A-40
Figure A-31: xRAP-100 connectors .............................................................................A-41
Figure A-32: xRAP front panel .....................................................................................A-43
Figure A-33: xRAP connector and slide switch panel ..................................................A-44
Figure A-34: Cable guide .............................................................................................A-45
Figure A-35: Using cable guiding rods.........................................................................A-45
Figure A-36: Fiber guide for ETSI A racks ...................................................................A-46
Figure A-37: Fiber guide for ETSI B racks ...................................................................A-46
Figure A-38: Fiber Storage Tray, top view ...................................................................A-47
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary vii

Maintenance Manual
Figure A-39: xDDF-21 patch panel for unbalanced E1 interfaces ...............................A-48

Figure A-40: Label inside xDDF-21 patch panel door..................................................A-48
Figure A-41: ODF internal view....................................................................................A-49
Figure A-42: ODF front panel.......................................................................................A-50
Figure A-43: Optical Patch Panel, top view .................................................................A-51
Figure B-1: TPU/OCU shelf............................................................................................B-3
Figure B-2: TPU and OCU slots designation .................................................................B-4
Figure B-3: Basic XDM-100 ...........................................................................................B-5
Figure B-4: Expanded XDM-100 ....................................................................................B-5
Figure B-5: Double-expanded XDM-100........................................................................B-6
Figure B-6: CRPT25_2C module ...................................................................................B-8
Figure B-7: CTRP25_2C module ...................................................................................B-9
Figure B-8: CCMB25_2D module ................................................................................B-10
Figure B-9: TC module.................................................................................................B-12
Figure B-10: MO_CMD4C module ...............................................................................B-13
Figure B-11: MO_CMD8 module..................................................................................B-14
Figure B-12: MO_CMD4C_E module ..........................................................................B-15
Figure B-13: MO_CMD4SL module ............................................................................B-16
Figure B-14: Typical MO_COADM1AB_xx module .....................................................B-17
Figure B-15: Typical MO_COADM2AB_Gxx module...................................................B-18
Figure B-16: MO_4CP4SPMM50 module....................................................................B-19
Figure B-17: MO_4CP4SPMM62 module....................................................................B-20
Figure B-18: MO_4CP4SPSM module ........................................................................B-21
Figure B-19: Removing the connector cover and the fastening bracket from the first
TPU/OCU .....................................................................................................................B-23
Figure B-20: Assembling M2.5 x 6 and M2.5 x 4 screws.............................................B-23
Figure B-21: Inserting the TPU/OCU connector on to the first TPU/OCU shelf ..........B-24
Figure B-22: Lowering the second TPU/OCU on to the expanded shelf .....................B-25
Figure B-23: Securing the second TPU/OCU on to the expanded shelf .....................B-25
Figure C-1: POWER IN input power connectors, pin functions .................................... C-3
Figure C-2: USB connector, pin identification ............................................................... C-3
Figure C-3: ALARMS connector, pin identification........................................................ C-4
Figure C-4: F-CHANNEL connector, pin identification................................................ C-10
Figure C-5: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors, pin identification ....................... C-11
Figure C-6: ETHERNET connectors, pin identification ............................................... C-12
viii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Table of Figures
Maintenance Manual
Figure C-7: PIM2_21 module E1 connectors pin identification................................... C-13

Figure C-8: PIM2_63 typical pair connectors, pin identification.................................. C-17
Figure C-9: 10/100BaseT connectors, pin identification ............................................. C-21
Figure C-10: SHELF EXTERNAL ALARM/CONTROL connector, pin identification .. C-22
Figure C-11: RAP connector, pin identification ........................................................... C-23
Figure C-12: CONTROL CONNECTION connector, pin identification ....................... C-24
Figure C-13: xRAP-100 shelf DC input power connectors, pin functions ................... C-27
Figure C-14: SHELF alarm connectors, pin identification........................................... C-27
Figure C-15: ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin identification......................................... C-29
Figure D-1: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks............................................................. D-4
Figure D-2: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks .................................................. D-5
Figure D-3: Example of an approved European 19 rack ............................................. D-7
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary ix

Maintenance Manual
x ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

List of Tables
Table 2-1: Sequence of equipment installation.............................................................. 2-1
Table 2-2: Equipment dimensions ................................................................................. 2-4
Table 2-3: Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools............................................... 2-6
Table 2-4: Optical fibers and mating connector data ................................................... 2-16
Table 2-5: Traffic cables mating connector data.......................................................... 2-17
Table 2-6: Patch traffic cables connecting I/O modules to the TPU ............................ 2-18
Table 2-7: Optical fibers and mating connector data ................................................... 2-18
Table 2-8: Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data................................ 2-19
Table 2-9: SFP transceivers laser information............................................................. 2-27
Table 2-10: 2.5 Gbps optical SFP transceivers for transponders/combiners .............. 2-27
Table 2-11: GbE/FC/FICON SFP optical transceivers for transponders/combiners.... 2-27
Table 3-1: Outline of typical XDM-100 installation sequence ........................................ 3-5
Table 3-2: XDM-100 recommended circuit breakers ................................................... 3-21
Table 3-3: xRAP input and output alarm allocation...................................................... 3-25
Table 4-1: Card and module inventory........................................................................... 4-4
Table 4-2: Visual inspection and mechanical check ...................................................... 4-5
Table 4-3: Measured optical levels ................................................................................ 4-6
Table 4-4: Traffic stability test time intervals................................................................ 4-11
Table 4-5: Throughput and latency test results............................................................ 4-18
Table 4-6: Frame loss rate test results ........................................................................ 4-19
Table 4-7: BER and Stability Test time intervals.......................................................... 4-26
Table 5-1: Preventive maintenance inspection and checks........................................... 5-2
Table 5-2: Aggregate and I/O modules monitoring data.............................................. 5-10
Table 5-3: Troubleshooting power problems ............................................................... 5-13
Table 5-4: General troubleshooting procedures for cards/modules............................. 5-14
Table 5-5: General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins ......... 5-15
Table 5-6: Troubleshooting procedures for electrical interface modules..................... 5-15
Table 5-7: Troubleshooting procedures for optical OADM and mux/demux................ 5-16
Table 5-8: Troubleshooting procedures for EISM modules ......................................... 5-16
Table 5-9: Troubleshooting procedures for timing subsystem..................................... 5-17
Table 5-10: Troubleshooting transmission and traffic alarms ...................................... 5-18
Table 5-11: Troubleshooting management communication......................................... 5-20
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xi

List of Tables XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Table A-1: FCU front panel LED indicators....................................................................A-3

Table A-2: ECU-F indicators and functions....................................................................A-6
Table A-3: ECU indicators and functions .......................................................................A-8
Table A-4: MXC-100 indicators and functions .............................................................A-11
Table A-5: Available aggregate module types .............................................................A-14
Table A-6: SAM1_4/E front panel LED indicators........................................................A-16
Table A-7: SAM1_4/O front panel LED indicators .......................................................A-17
Table A-8: SAM4_2 front panel LED indicators ...........................................................A-18
Table A-9: SAM16_1 front panel LED indicators .........................................................A-19
Table A-10: SAM1_4/OE front panel LED indicators ...................................................A-20
Table A-11: I/O module types ......................................................................................A-20
Table A-12: PIM2_21 front panel LED indicators.........................................................A-22
Table A-13: PIM2_63 front panel LED indicators.........................................................A-23
Table A-14: PIM345_3 front panel LED indicators.......................................................A-24
Table A-15: SIM1_4/E front panel LED indicators .......................................................A-25
Table A-16: SIM1_4/O front panel LED indicators.......................................................A-26
Table A-17: SIM4_2 front panel LED indicators...........................................................A-27
Table A-18: SIM1_4/OE front panel LED indicators ....................................................A-28
Table A-19: EISM_208 front panel LED indicators ......................................................A-30
Table A-20: Port cable options.....................................................................................A-30
Table A-22: Port cable options.....................................................................................A-32
Table A-24: TC front panel LED indicators ..................................................................A-35
Table A-25: TPM2_3 front panel LED indicators .........................................................A-37
Table A-26: TPMH_1 front panel LED indicators.........................................................A-38
Table A-27: xRAP-100 front panel component functions.............................................A-40
Table A-28: xRAP-100 connectors ..............................................................................A-41
Table A-29: xRAP front panel component functions ....................................................A-43
Table A-30: xRAP connectors and slide switches .......................................................A-44
Table A-31: Cables ......................................................................................................A-51
Table B-1: Supported modules in basic XDM-100.........................................................B-5
Table B-2: Supported modules in expanded XDM-100 .................................................B-6
Table B-3: Supported modules in double-expanded XDM-100 .....................................B-7
Table B-4: CRPT25_2C front panel LED indicators ......................................................B-8
xii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and List of Tables
Maintenance Manual
Table B-5: CTRP25_2C front panel LED indicators ......................................................B-9

Table B-6: CCMB25_2D front panel LED indicators....................................................B-10
Table B-7: TC front panel LED indicators ....................................................................B-12
Table B-8: MO_CMD4C front panel LED indicators ....................................................B-13
Table B-9: MO_CMD8 front panel LED indicators .......................................................B-14
Table B-10: MO_CMD4C_E front panel LED indicators..............................................B-15
Table B-11: MO_CMD4SL front panel LED indicators ................................................B-16
Table B-12: MO_COADM1AB_xx front panel LED indicators .....................................B-17
Table B-13: MO_COADM2AB_Gxx front panel LED indicators ..................................B-18
Table B-14: MO_4CP4SPMM50 front panel LED indicators .......................................B-19
Table B-15: MO_4CP4SPMM62 front panel LED indicators .......................................B-20
Table B-16: MO_4CP4SPSM front panel LED indicators............................................B-21
Table C-1: USB connector, pin assignment.................................................................. C-4
Table C-2: ALARMS connector, pin assignment .......................................................... C-5
Table C-3: ALARMS client cable wiring ........................................................................ C-6
Table C-4: xRAP-100 alarms cable wiring .................................................................... C-7
Table C-5: xRAP alarms cable wiring ........................................................................... C-9
Table C-6: F-CHANNEL connector, pin assignment .................................................. C-10
Table C-7: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors, pin assignment .......................... C-11
Table C-8: ETHERNET connectors, pin assignment.................................................. C-12
Table C-9: PIM2_21 module, receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment .......... C-13
Table C-10: PIM2_21 module, transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment ....... C-15
Table C-11: PIM2_63 module, receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment ........ C-18
Table C-12: PIM2_63 module, typical transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment C-
19
Table C-13: 10/100BaseT connectors, pin assignment.............................................. C-21
Table C-14: SHELF EXTERNAL ALARM/CONTROL connector, pin assignment ..... C-22
Table C-15: RAP connector, pin assignment.............................................................. C-23
Table C-16: xRAP CONTROL CONNECTION connector, pin assignment................ C-24
Table C-17: SHELF alarm connectors, pin assignment.............................................. C-27
Table C-18: ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin assignment ........................................... C-29
Table E-1: ITU-T Rec. G.692 channel frequencies and wavelengths............................E-1
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xiii

List of Tables XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
xiv ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

About this Manual
In This Chapter
Overview ......................................................................................xv
Intended Audience........................................................................xv
Documentation Conventions .......................................................xvi
Related Documentation ...............................................................xvi
Obtaining Documentation............................................................xvi
Obtaining Technical Assistance .................................................xvii
Documentation Feedback ...........................................................xvii
Your Opinion Is Very Important To Us .....................................xvii
Overview
The XDM-100 Installation and Maintenance Manual (IMM) provides
installation and maintenance instructions for XDM-100 shelves.
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for installation and other qualified service personnel
responsible for installing the system and its accessories.
The instructions in this manual require you to understand and follow the safety
practices included in this manual, as well as any applicable national regulations
and those enforced at your site. They also require that you understand the
physical, optical and electrical requirements of the installation site.
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xv

Documentation Conventions XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Documentation Conventions
When applicable, this manual uses the following conventions:
Convention Indicates Example
Bold Names of menus and On the Alarms menu
commands
Menu Option A selection from a menu Select Update View
Objects
Italics New terms and Build-as-you-grow
emphasized text architecture
Boxes around text Notes, cautions, warnings See examples below
NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying

information, specific instructions, commentary, sidelights, or
interesting points of information.
CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or
loss of information.
WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

to follow directions could result in bodily harm or loss of life.
Related Documentation
The following publications may be of assistance to you in the installation and
commissioning processes. Some of these documents present information
supplied in this installation manual in greater or lesser detail.
XDM-100 Miniature MSPP for Metro-Access and Cellular Networks
General Description
XDM System Specifications
XDM Element Management System (EMS-XDM) User Manual
eNM LightSoft Network Management System User Manual
IEC Publication 825 Laser Safety Requirements
xvi ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Obtaining Technical Assistance
Maintenance Manual
Obtaining Technical Assistance

The installation and operation of XDM platforms and their configuration for
network operation is a highly specialized process. Due to the different nature of
each installation and the special concerns of any facility, some of the
installation planning aspects may not be covered in this guide.
If you have questions or concerns about your network design, or if you require
installation personnel to perform the actual installation process, ECI Telecom
maintains a staff of design engineers and a sizeable team of highly trained field
service personnel. The services of the group are available to customers at any
time.
If you are interested in obtaining design assistance or a network installation
plan from ECI Telecom Customer Support team, contact your ECI Telecom
sales representative. With any support related issues, technical or logistic,
please contact the ECI Telecom customer support center at your location. If
you are not familiar with that location, please contact our central customer
support center action line at:
Telephone + 972-3-9266000
Telefax + 972-3-9266370
Email mailto:on.support@ecitele.com
Documentation Feedback
Your comments are welcome. Please send us your comments in one of the
following ways:
Email your comments to on.documentation@ecitele.com
Fax your comments to +972-3-9268060
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xvii

Your Opinion Is Very Important To XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Us Maintenance Manual
Your Opinion Is Very Important To Us

The Documentation Department at ECI Telecom's Optical Networks Division would like your
feedback on the quality and usefulness of this document. Your comments can be of great value in
helping us improve our documentation.
When you have completed this form, please fax it to: +972-3-9268060.
Product Name: Date:
Document Title: Name:
Document Number: Company:
Release Date: Email:
On a scale from 1 (poor) to 5 (excellent), rate the following:
1 2 3 4 5
Is the information clearly presented?
Was it easy to find the information you were looking for?
What is your overall assessment of this document?
Do you need more information? Yes No
If yes, please indicate the topic/s:
What features did you like most about this manual?
If you found errors or have any other suggestions for improving this document, please indicate the
topic, section and page number below:
Please check the ways you feel we could improve this document:
Document organization Make it shorter
Table of contents Add more detail
Index Make it less/more technical
Include more figures Add more/better reference aids
Clearer procedures/instructions Other (please indicate):
Please add any other detail you would like to mention for improvement:
xviii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

1
1 Introduction
In This Chapter
The XDM-100 Concept .............................................................. 1-2
XDM-100 Platform Overview.................................................... 1-3
XDM-100 Platform Options....................................................... 1-4
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-1

The XDM-100 Concept XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
The XDM-100 Concept

ECI Telecoms Optical Networks Divisions XDM is a family of platforms of
multiple technologies that provides solutions for virtually every application.
Several shelves have been designed to adapt to your particular needs, all within
a build-as-you-grow architecture. Miniature MSPP platforms for metro-
access applications include: XDM-100, XDM-100H, and XDM-200, which
share the same hardware. Full size MSPP platforms for metro-core applications
include XDM-400, XDM-500, XDM-1000, and XDM-2000.
XDM platforms are supplied in several shelf configurations, one of which is
the XDM-100 you are installing.
Depending on the application, topology, and required configuration, the
following types of XDM shelves are available:
XDM-200 compact CWDM platform for metro-access networks
XDM-400 fully functional, smaller version of the XDM platform,
uniquely designed for metro-access, cellular networks, and long-haul
applications
XDM-500 data aware access gateway compact shelf designed for
medium interface capacities and street cabinet installations
XDM-1000 multiservice metro optical platform highly dense shelf
designed for high capacity central exchange applications
XDM-2000 multifunctional intelligent optical switch, optimized for
optical DWDM applications
For further details on any of these platforms, please refer to the relevant
General Description.
1-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and XDM-100 Platform Overview
Maintenance Manual
XDM-100 Platform Overview

ECI Telecom's XDM-100 compact MSPP delivers a cost-effective and
affordable mix of Ethernet, SDH and PDH services, resulting in new revenue-
generating opportunities. It offers a wide variety of features and benefits,
including:
Gradual in-service capacity expansion based on service provisioning needs.
An optical connection operating at a specific STM rate can be upgraded
from STM-1 to STM-4/STM-16 without affecting traffic.
Sublambda grooming enables high utilization of existing fibers and top
efficiency in transmission of different types of services.
Multi-ADM and cross-connect functionality for deployment in flexible
network topologies, such as ring, mesh, and star.
The XDM-100 is compact and resilient, making it perfectly suited for both
indoor and outdoor enclosures. Due to its extended operating temperature
range, it is also well suited for harsh environmental conditions.
The XDM-100 shelf was designed to facilitate simple installation and
maintenance. Hot insertion of cards and modules is allowed, supporting quick
maintenance and repair without affecting traffic.
For a detailed description of the XDM-100 platform, see the XDM-100
Miniature MSPP for Metro-Access and Cellular Networks General Description.
Figure 1-1: XDM-100 shelf

XDM-100 Platform Options XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
XDM-100 Platform Options

The XDM-100 is an extremely versatile platform. Therefore, there are
numerous installation options, including different system configurations,
different I/O module combinations, and different protection schemes for
various implementation needs.
Three redundancy/protection configurations are available:
Nonredundant XDM-100 system configuration. The system comprises only
one MXC-100 card, installed in slot MXC-A, while a bridging unit,
MXC-BR, is installed in slot MXC-B. There is no redundancy provided for
MXC-100 functions.
Basic XDM-100 shelf with two identical MXC-100 cards, supporting
systems common functions redundancy (power supply, timing units,
switching matrices, control).
Expanded XDM-100 shelf with I/O protection. A Tributary Protection Unit
(TPU) is mounted on top of the basic shelf, providing protection to the I/O
modules. Each Tributary Protection Module (TPM) is connected to both
operating and protection I/O modules in the shelf, in a 1:1 or 1:3
configuration. If a failure is detected in one of the operating I/O modules,
the active MXC via Tributary Control (TC) module in the TPU switches
the traffic from the active I/O module to the protection module.
Hybrid XDM-100 shelf (XDM-100H). A TPU/OCU (Tributary Protection
Unit/Optical CWDM Unit) shelf can be mounted on top of the XDM-100
basic shelf to add I/O protection and CWDM optical networking
capabilities. The TPU/OCU is identical in physical dimensions to the TPU
and supports any mix of TPMs, OADMs, mux/demux, and
couplers/splitters. Up to two TPU/OCU shelves can be installed on the
basic XDM-100 shelf.
A wide variety of I/O and aggregate modules can be installed in the slots of the
XDM-100 shelf:
The MXC-100 can house one or two SDH aggregate modules (SAMs) out
of the five available module types
The eight I/O slots in the modules cage can house any combination of the
seven available I/O PDH or SDH module types the three available data
tributary (EISM) module types and CWDM I/O modules
All XDM-100 cards, modules, and redundancy/protection options are described
in Equipment Description (on page A-1). CWDM I/O and networking modules
are described in XDM-100H.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and XDM-100 Platform Options
Maintenance Manual
NOTE: It is recommended that the XDM-100 shelf be

installed in an ETSI A rack (2200 mm or 2600 mm).
However, it can also be installed in an ETSI B rack or in 19",
600 mm depth racks (without air filters), which have been
approved by ECI Telecom. (For detailed information about
ETSI A and ETSI B racks refer to Rack Options (see
"Installation Options" on page 3-8)).

XDM-100 Platform Options XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual

2
2 Before You Start
In This Chapter
Overview .................................................................................... 2-1
Outline of Installation Procedure................................................ 2-1
Site Preparation........................................................................... 2-3
Tools and Test Equipment .......................................................... 2-5
Installing XDM-100 in Racks..................................................... 2-7
Preparing Cables and Fibers ..................................................... 2-13
Work and Equipment Safety..................................................... 2-19
Protection against ESD............................................................. 2-28
Overview
This chapter contains important information that will help you carry out a safe
and trouble-free installation.
Outline of Installation Procedure

The main steps involved in the installation of an XDM-100 shelf are listed in
the following table. Consult your site installation plans for specific details.
Table 2-1: Sequence of equipment installation
No. Task Reference
1 Prepare the installation site and check physical location, Site Requirements (see
environmental compliance, and availability of power sources. "Site Preparation" on
page 2-3)

Outline of Installation Procedure XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
No. Task Reference
2 Prepare power, alarm, management, and transmission cables at Preparing Cables and
the installation site. Fibers (on page 2-13),
Equipment Installation
(on page 3-1)
3 Route the required power, alarm, management, and transmission Equipment Installation
cables to the intended XDM-100 equipment location. (on page 3-1)
4 If required, install the equipment racks. Rack Installation
5 Mark the location of each XDM-100 shelf and relevant
accessories (Fiber Storage Tray [FST], patch panels, and Optical
Distribution Frame [ODF]) on each rack, in accordance with the
site installation plan.
Note: If you are currently installing an XDM-100 shelf without
TPU protection, you may want to leave sufficient space above
the shelf to enable the addition of the TPU cage at a later stage.
6 When applicable, install the EMS-XDM management station. EMS-XDM
User Manual
7 Install the power distribution and alarm panels Installing the xRAP-100
(xRAP/xRAP-100) and other equipment needed in each rack. (on page 3-13) or
Installing the xRAP (on
page 3-23)
8 Install the XDM-100 shelves in the appropriate rack. Installing the XDM-100
Shelf in the Rack (on
page 3-45)
9 For each XDM-100 shelf where optical modules are used, install Installing the Fiber
an FST above the XDM-100 shelf and route the optical fibers to Storage Tray (on page
the FST. 3-35)
Note: Even if you are not currently installing an FST, it is
recommended that you leave enough space above the XDM-100
shelf to enable future installation, in case optical modules are
added to the shelf at a later stage.
10 Install the ECU, FCU, and MXC cards in the shelf. Installing XDM-100
Cards (on page 3-48)
11 Install the prescribed I/O modules in the shelf. Installing XDM-100
Modules (on page 3-53)
12 Install the prescribed aggregate modules in the MXC-100 card. Installing Aggregate
Modules in MXC-100
Cards (on page 3-54)
13 If applicable, install the TC card and the prescribed TPMs in Installing TPU Modules
the TPU. (on page 3-63)

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Site Preparation
Maintenance Manual
No. Task Reference
14 Depending on the modules in your XDM-100 shelf: Connecting Fibers and

Route the optical fibers from the FST to the relevant module Cables to the XDM-100
connectors. Shelf in ETSI A racks
(on page 3-69) or
Route the E1 electrical cables to the patch panel location. Connecting Fibers and
Route the data cables to the EISM modules. Cables to the XDM-100
For each XDM-100 shelf where electrical E1 modules are Shelf in ETSI B Racks
(on page 3-81)
used and 120 /75 conversion is required, install a patch
panel. You will need a separate patch panel for each
PIM2_21 module in the shelf.
Note: The patch panel can be installed on the same rack,
above the XDM-100 shelf, or on a different rack.
If you are not using a Tributary Protection Unit (TPU), or for
modules which are not protected, connect coaxial and
multipair traffic cables to the electrical I/O modules.
If you are using a TPU, connect both the electrical I/O
modules and the coaxial and multipair traffic cables to the
TPU.
15 Connect management cables between the equipment installed in Connecting
the rack and the management station. Management Cables (on
page 3-79)
16 Connect power and alarm monitoring cables from the Installing the xRAP-100
xRAP/xRAP-100 panels to each XDM-100 installed in the rack. (on page 3-13) or
Installing the xRAP
NOTE: In some cases, you may need to add a TPU unit after
the XDM-100 has already been installed. Instructions for this
procedure are provided in Installing a TPU on the XDM-100
Shelf (on page 3-84).
Site Preparation
Perform a preliminary survey of the installation site, taking into consideration
the following issues:
System environmental requirements,
Physical location of the XDM-100 shelves
Location of power sources
Types of interfaces used at the site (optical, electrical, management, alarm
monitoring, and so on)
Work and equipment safety requirements

Site Preparation XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Environmental Requirements
The following environmental conditions are applicable to XDM-100 equipment
and must be provided at the installation site:
Parameter Compliance requirements

Electromagnetic interference FTZ 1TR9, EN 55022/94, EN 50082-1/92
Temperature ETSI ETS 300-19-2-3 Test Spec. T3.1
Physical Location
WARNING: XDM-100 shelves are intended for installation

in restricted access areas only.
Before You Start:

Choose the physical location of the XDM-100 shelves, taking the following
aspects into consideration:
1. Equipment dimensions, as specified in the table below.
2. Required floor loading capability: 150 kg per rack for a typical 4-shelf
installation.
3. Routing requirements for grounding, power, alarm monitoring and
management cables, and optical fibers. To ensure convenient access to
cables and fibers, whenever possible it is recommended to use overhead
cable ladders to bring the cables/fibers to the top of each rack.
4. When a network management station, for example, EMS-XDM, is installed
on the site, consider the method of connection to the local network
management station and the maximum allowed distance.
Table 2-2: Equipment dimensions
Equipment type Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm) Max. weight (kg)
XDM-100 200 443 231 7.6 (shelf only)
20.2 (fully populated)
TPU 75 443 231 5.5 (shelf only)
10 (fully populated)
XDM-100 + TPU 275 443 231 13.1 (shelf only)
30.2 (fully populated)

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Tools and Test Equipment
Maintenance Manual
Equipment type Height (mm) Width (mm) Depth (mm) Max. weight (kg)
xRAP 100 450 285 10
xRAP-100 133 445 185 10
xDDF-21 44.5 440 150 3
Fiber Storage Tray 44.5 440 240 5
ODF 44.5 440 240 8
Power Sources
XDM-100 shelves must be powered only by DC sources complying with the
applicable sections of ETSI 300 132-2 and FTZ 19S1, and the SELV or TNV
requirements of EN 60950. The nominal supply voltage is -48 or -60 VDC
(positive lead grounded); however, the allowed supply voltage range is -40 to
-75 VDC. For redundancy, two separate DC power sources should be available.
The power consumption of the XDM-100 is:
Typical: 300 W
Maximum: 600 W
NOTE: If the planned power consumption of the equipment

installed in the shelf is 80% or more of the maximum listed
value, it is recommended to consult ECI Telecoms Customer
Support.
Tools and Test Equipment

No special-purpose tools beyond a standard technician toolbox are required for
the installation of XDM-100 shelves.
Tools for Traffic Cable Assembly

Since traffic cables can be prepared onsite, suitable tool kits should also be
available. This includes tools for the assembly of coaxial cables (see list of
recommended tools in the following table) and tools for the preparation of
optical patch cords.

Tools and Test Equipment XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Table 2-3: Recommended coaxial cable assembly tools
No. Name Description

1 Stripper DIN 1.0/2.3
2 Center contact crimp tool (blue) DIN 1.0/2.3
3 Crimp tool, outer DIN 1.0/2.3
4 Cable stripper NCX1
5 Nipper (cutter for center contact) NCX1
6 Die for NCX1 NCX1
Cleaning Optical Connectors

When handling optical fibers, it is necessary to clean optical connectors. For
this purpose, use the standard cleaning kits recommended by the optical
connector manufacturers.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Installing the XDM-100 in Racks
Maintenance Manual
Installing the XDM-100 in Racks

The XDM-100 can be installed in the following rack types:
ECI Telecom's recommended ETSI rack (2200 mm or 2600 mm)
(hereinafter referred to as ETSI A rack), which provides the following
benefits:
Removable rear and side panels for tidy routing and efficient
maintenance of all rack cables, including:
E1 cables
Control cables
Power cables
Data cables
Timing cables
Two ducts on the racks front rails for routing up to 200 optical fibers
Open frame top and bottom for easy routing of cables from suspension
floors and/or ceiling ladders
Perforated door for free air flow to the installed equipment (see
Environmental Requirements (on page 2-4))
Front door for left or right opening mounting
Standard ETSI rack (2200 mm or 2600 mm) (hereinafter referred to as
ETSI B rack)
19" 600 mm deep rack (in consultation with and with the approval of ECI
Telecom's Mechanical Department)
XDM-100 equipment racks may be installed on wooden, concrete, or floating
floors, or suspended from overhead mountings. For information on the various
mounting options, see Rack Installation.

Installing the XDM-100 in Racks XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Environmental Considerations
Observe the following guidelines for the installation of XDM-100 shelves in
racks:
1. Free airflow through the rack must be guaranteed at all times.
2. XDM-100 shelves can be installed in open or closed (with door) racks.
When installed in a closed rack, the door must be perforated. An example
of a rack with a perforated door is the ETSI A rack shown in the figure
below.
3. Always install the first XDM-100 shelf in the lower part of the rack,
leaving a space of at least 1U from the bottom of the rack.
4. In mixed (horizontal and vertical airflow) equipment installations, always
install the equipment with the horizontal airflow (XDM-100) in the lower
part of the rack, and the equipment with the vertical airflow (for example,
XDM-1000) above it.
5. Leave a space of at least 1U between the upper accessory of the XDM-100
and the next shelf.
6. Leave as much space as possible between the racks cable supports and the
XDM-100 sidewalls.
7. Always consider the shelf airflow requirements when organizing the cable
and fiber routes near the XDM-100 sidewalls.

Maintenance Manual
Figure 2-1: ETSI A rack

Maintenance Manual
Typical XDM-100 Installation

In addition to the XDM-100 shelf itself, the equipment installed in the rack
includes:
One XDM Rack Alarm Panel (xRAP/xRAP-100) installed at the top of the
rack. The xRAP/xRAP-100 is used to connect external power and alarm
monitoring lines to the XDM-100 shelves installed in the rack. The xRAP
fully supports up to two XDM-100shelves, whereas the xRAP-100 fully
supports up to four XDM-100shelves.
In addition to the space needed for xRAP/xRAP-100 installation, you must
leave at least 50 mm free space under the xRAP/xRAP-100 for cable
routing.
Fiber Storage Tray. A separate FST can be installed above each XDM-100
with optical modules. Each FST contains two storage reels, enabling the
fiber to be stored on the right or left side of the tray. Leave at least 50 mm
free space between the XDM-100 cabling accessories and its FST, and
another 50 mm free between the fiber tray and the next XDM-100 shelf.
Cable guide. A cable guide should be installed just above the XDM-100. It
helps neatly route of electrical cables connected to the shelf.
A fiber guide installed above the cable guide. The fiber guide helps to
obtain a tidy route of fibers, while keeping the minimum allowed bend
radius.
xDDF-21. A separate xDDF-21 panel can be used when unbalanced 75

interfaces need to be connected and converted to balanced 120 interfaces
of PIM2_21 and PIM2_63 modules. Leave at least 100 mm free space
above the XDM-100 shelf and below the xDDF-21.

Maintenance Manual
Integrating XDM-100 Shelves and Other

Equipment in One Rack
XDM-100 shelves and associated accessories may not occupy the entire rack.
Additional equipment may be installed in the remaining rack space, provided
that any heat generated by additional equipment can be efficiently dissipated,
and that thermal isolation is provided between the various equipment units
installed in the same rack.
In case of additional equipment being installed on the rack, contact ECI
Telecoms Customer Support team for assistance.

Maintenance Manual
Figure 2-2: Typical installation in an ETSI A rack

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Preparing Cables and Fibers
Maintenance Manual
Preparing Cables and Fibers
NOTE: This section provides information needed for

preparing cables and optical fibers. The necessary cables can
also be ordered from ECI Telecom. For details, contact ECI
Telecoms Customer Support team or your ECI Telecom
sales representative.
Before You Start:

The following main types of cables are required for installing the XDM-100:
Grounding cables, described in Grounding Cables (on page 2-14)
DC power cables, described in DC Power Cables (on page 2-14)
Alarm cables, described in Alarm Cables (on page 2-15)
Management cables, described in Management Cables (on page 2-15)
Timing (clock) cables, described in Timing (Clock) Cables (on page 2-16)
Optical fibers, described in Optical Fibers (on page 2-16)
Electric traffic cables, described in Electric Traffic Cables (on page 2-17)
Data cables for EISM modules, described in Data Cables for EISM
Modules (on page 2-18)
Some of these cables are supplied by ECI Telecom as part of the XDM-100
equipment, while others must be prepared onsite or ordered separately from
ECI Telecom. A list of the cables supplied by ECI Telecom appears in
Equipment Description (on page A-1).
In the following sections, you will find information about the cables and their
preparation onsite. See Appendix C (see "Connection Data" on page C-1) for a
description of the equipment connector types and cable wiring.
WARNING: When preparing cables, in particular power and

grounding cables, use only UL-listed components of the
specified types. Components must also comply with any
applicable national and local safety codes and regulations.
Only qualified, trained personnel may be involved in the
preparation of the various cable types. Personnel must use
only approved procedures, in accordance with the applicable
workmanship practice.

Preparing Cables and Fibers XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Grounding Cables
Equipment installed in racks is bonded through the screws that are used to
fasten the equipment chassis to the frame of the rack. Therefore, it is necessary
to provide a reliable, low-impedance connection between the rack frame and
the site grounding bus using copper conductors.
Connect the rack grounding screw and the site grounding bar with a 2 AWG
(35 mm2) or thicker copper lead with yellow/green insulation, in compliance
with UL/ETSI recommendations. The xRAP/xRAP-100 end of the lead must
be terminated in an M6 lug suitable for the gage of the lead in use.
Route grounding conductors along the shortest possible route. Treat the bare
portion of the conductor with antioxidant and connect a listed two-hole
compression lug. If the lug is not plated, bring it to a bright finish and coat it
with antioxidant before connecting it to the frame of the rack. Do not mix
conductors of different types of metal.
DC Power Cables
DC power cables should be prepared onsite. Two types of DC power cables are
needed:
xRAP/xRAP-100 input power cables
Shelf power cables
xRAP/xRAP-100 input power cables

The xRAP/xRAP-100 input power cables are prepared onsite. They connect
input power from the site power distribution subsystem to the DC input
terminals of the rack xRAP/xRAP-100 panel.
Two input power cables are required for each rack, one for each source. The
cables must use copper leads complying with UL/ETSI recommendations. Use
a red lead for the positive conductor and a black lead for the negative
conductor. The xRAP/xRAP-100 cable ends must be terminated in M6 cable
lugs matching the conductor gage.
The recommended cable gage is 2 AWG (35 mm2) or thicker. This gage
ensures that the voltage drop across the rack power cable does not exceed 2 V,
even for cable runs of up to 30 meters connected to an xRAP/xRAP-100
providing power to multiple XDM-100 shelves.
When the xRAP/xRAP-100 is used to provide power to a single XDM-100
shelf, lower lead gages may be used, depending on the cable run, as follows:
for runs not exceeding 50 meters, it is sufficient to use 25 m2 copper leads.

Maintenance Manual
Shelf power cables

Two 12 AWG cables, supplied by ECI Telecom, are used to connect the two
redundant input power sources from the xRAP/xRAP-100 panel to the POWER
IN connectors on the MXC-100 cards A, B respectively of each XDM-100
shelf installed in the rack. For non-redundant configuration, both cables are
connected to the same MXC-100 card.
Alarm Cables
Alarm cables used within XDM-100 equipment racks are included in the
shipment according to the site specifications.
Alarm indications are carried by the following cables:
Shelf alarm indication cable. One shelf alarm indication cable is required
for each XDM-100 shelf installed in the rack. The cable connects between
the ALARMS connector on the XDM-100 and one of the RAP connectors
located on the xRAP or SHELF connectors located on the xRAP-100.
Cable length is 2.0 m. Refer to xRAP alarms cable (on page C-9) for a
description of this cable.
Bay alarm cable. This cable is usually prepared onsite, and carries the
alarm indications and monitoring lines of the bay (rack). The alarm
indications and monitoring lines are available in the CONTROL
CONNECTION connector located on the xRAP or in the ALARM IN/OUT
connector located on the xRAP-100. One bay alarm cable is required for
each rack.
Management Cables
The connection of out-of-band management communication to an XDM-100 is
made by means of a mini-hub with a pair of the RJ-45 ETHERNET connectors,
located on the ECU-F card.
If one XDM-100 is installed, the connection is made to the MNG MAIN RJ-45
connector. If more than one XDM-100 is installed in the same site, it is
possible to save the use of an external hub. In this case, the first system is
connected as explained above, and the other systems are connected in an
ETHERNET daisy chain. The MNG MAIN connector of each system is
connected to the MNG PROT connector of the previous system.
If ECU cards are used, each XDM-100 is connected to an external hub.
Suitable standard Ethernet station cables are available from many sources.
Cables of Category 3 or better must be used. In any case, the length of the

Maintenance Manual
cables must not exceed the maximum recommended for the cable type and hub
port in use (up to a few dozen meters).
Timing (Clock) Cables

The ECU/ECU-F on the XDM-100 shelf has two timing reference connectors,
T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2, which are used for 2.048 Mbps signals and have
balanced (120 W) G.703 interfaces.
The cables used to connect to these connectors are prepared onsite, and they
comprise individually shielded twisted pairs (the same type of pairs needed for
connection to the balanced E1 tributary interfaces).
If the site timing reference distribution subsystem has unbalanced (75 ) G.703
interfaces, a 120 /75 adapter can be supplied for mounting on the
T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors. This permits using coaxial cables
(BT3002 or equivalent) of the same type used for connecting to balanced E1
tributary interfaces.
Optical Fibers
Optical fibers can be prepared onsite.
Optical fibers used to connect to optical interfaces should use only 2 mm fibers.
For each optical interface, ECI Telecom supplies patch cords with mating
optical connectors already attached to the fiber. Therefore, only the optical
termination on the ODF side, which is installation-dependent, must be installed
onsite.
The optical fibers for connecting to equipment installed in a given rack should
enter the rack from the top, be threaded through cable guides running along the
rack side rails, and end at the fiber storage tray. The tray must contain enough
fiber length for extracting modules from the XDM-100 and for replacing fiber
in case of damage (splicing repairs).
When routing fibers, make sure to observe the minimum bending radius (35
mm).
The following table lists the type of cables and mating connectors needed to
prepare cables for each XDM-100 module.
Table 2-4: Optical fibers and mating connector data
Mating Qty/
I/O module Interface type Fiber type
connector module
SIM1_4/O STM-1 optical 1 pair of fiber patch LC male 8 fibers
cords per interface

Maintenance Manual
Mating Qty/
connector module
SIM1_4/OE STM-1 optical 1 pair of fiber patch LC male 4 fibers
cords per interface
SAM1_4/O STM-1 optical 1 pair of fiber patch LC male 8 fibers
cords per interface
SAM1_4/OE STM-1 optical 1 pair of fiber patch LC male 4 fibers
cords per interface
SIM4_2 STM-4 optical 1 pair of fiber patch LC male 4 fibers
cords per interface
SAM4_2 STM-4 optical 1 pair of fiber patch LC male 4 fibers
cords per interface
SAM16_1 STM-16 1 pair of fiber patch LC male 2 fibers
cords per interface
NOTE: SIM1_4/OE and SAM 1_4/OE modules are mixed

modules that include optical and electrical interfaces.
Electric Traffic Cables

Some electric traffic cables can be prepared onsite. The table below lists the
type of cables and mating connectors needed for each XDM-100 traffic
interface type.
NOTE: The connectors are identical regardless of whether

the traffic cables are connected directly to the I/O modules or
to TPMs on the TPU.
Table 2-5: Traffic cables mating connector data
Mating Qty/
connector module
PIM2_21 E1 balanced Twin multipair cable (2 x Twin 50-pin 1
(2.048 Mbps) 21 shielded 120 twisted SCSI male
pairs)
PIM2_63 E1 balanced Twin multipair cable (2 x Twin 50-pin 3
(2.048 Mbps) 21 shielded 120 twisted SCSI male
pairs)
PIM345_3 E3 and DS3 NCX coaxial cable DIN1.0/2.3 6
(34/45 Mbps) male

Maintenance Manual
Mating Qty/
connector module
SIM1_4/E STM-1 NCX coaxial cable DIN1.0/2.3 8
electrical male
SIM1_4/OE STM-1 NCX coaxial cable DIN1.0/2.3 4
electrical male
SAM1_4/E STM-1 NCX coaxial cable DIN1.0/2.3 8
electrical male
SAM1_4/OE STM-1 NCX coaxial cable DIN1.0/2.3 4
electrical male
NOTE: SIM1_4/OE and SAM 1_4/OE modules are mixed

When a TPU is used, additional patch traffic cables between PIMs and TPMs
are required, as described in the table below.
Table 2-6: Patch traffic cables connecting I/O modules to the TPU
Qty/
TPM Interface type Cable type Mating connector
module
TPM2_ 3 E1 balanced Twin multipair PIM: Twin 50-pin SCSI 4
(2.048 Mbps) cable (21 pairs male
of shielded 120 TPM: 100-pin SCSI male
twisted pairs)
TPMH_1 E3 and DS3 RG179x8 PIM: DIN1.0/2.3 male 2
(34/45 Mbps) multicoaxial TPM: 8W8 D-type
STM-1 electrical cable
Data Cables for EISM Modules

EISM modules are connected by electrical cables or optical fibers according to
the interface type being connected.
Ethernet electrical interfaces are connected by CAT5 UPT 2-pair cables
terminated with RJ-45 connectors.
Table 2-7: Optical fibers and mating connector data
EISM Port No. Interface Mating Qty/

Fiber type
module type connector module
EISM_244 1-2 GbE/FX 1 pair of fiber patch LC male 8 fibers
cords per interface

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Work and Equipment Safety
Maintenance Manual

Fiber type
3-4 FX 1 pair of fiber patch LC male
cords per interface
EISM_226 1-2 GbE/FX 1 pair of fiber patch LC male 4 fibers
cords per interface
NOTE: EISM_244 and EISM_226 modules are mixed

The table below the type of Ethernet electrical traffic cables and the mating
connectors needed for each EISM module.
Table 2-8: Ethernet electrical cables and mating connector data

Cable type
EISM_208 1-8 FE 10/100BaseT RJ-45 8
CAT5 UPT
2-pair
EISM_244 5-8 FE 10/100BaseT RJ-45 8
CAT5 UPT
2-pair
EISM_226 1-2 FE 10/100BaseT RJ-45 4
CAT5 UPT
2-pair
NOTE: EISM_244 and EISM_226 modules are mixed

Work and Equipment Safety
WARNING: XDM-100 equipment is intended for installation

in restricted access areas only.

Work and Equipment Safety XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
General Safety Requirements

Make sure to install equipment in restricted access locations only.
XDM-100 shelves contain power sources of varying voltages. Take note of the
following guidelines for installing the shelves:
Before You Start:

Ensure the integrity of the grounding connections
Make sure that sufficient lighting is available while working on the
equipment
Do not work on any equipment when it is connected to a voltage source
(DC or AC), except for inserting/removing cards or modules (these
activities can be performed on operating equipment)
Ensure that the maximum working temperature does not exceed 55 C
Use only insulated tools during installation
Wear protective clothing as required by the requisite safety regulations
Do not install or maintain equipment connected to external lines (for
example, E1 tributaries) during thunderstorms
Avoid contact with high voltage sources when installing shelves, cards, and
modules
Make sure you are familiar with the warning signals and labels on the
equipment, and strictly observe the procedures needed to avoid the
indicated hazards
Grounding Requirements
All the equipment, including XDM-100 shelves, ancillary units, and equipment
from other vendors, must be properly grounded at all times. Good equipment
grounding is necessary to protect personnel and equipment, minimize noise,
and allow the discharge of accumulated static charges to earth.

Maintenance Manual
Rack grounding requirements

Connect the rack to the site grounding bar with a ground cable according to
ETSI recommendations (top/bottom connection).
The rack is supplied with a main copper or brass grounding bolt welded to the
rack frame. The grounding stud is identified on the rack by the ground symbol
label.
The bolt must be free of paint. The rack grounding bolt must be connected to
the site grounding bar by a 35 mm2 (2 AWG) grounding cable or thicker, as
short as possible, complying with UL/ETSI recommendations. The cable
should be made of copper strands, and terminated on both sides with bolt
terminals.
NOTE: If necessary, the gage of the grounding lead can also

be reduced to the gage of the xRAP/xRAP-100 power leads.
The rack mounting rails must be free of paint, and provide electrical continuity
to the main grounding bolt. The resistance between any rail and the rack main
grounding bolt must be less than 0.1 .
Pay particular attention to the area in which the xRAP/xRAP-100 is attached:
remove paint from the rack in this area to ensure efficient electrical contact.
CAUTION: Connect the xRAP/xRAP-100 grounding bolt to

the rack grounding bolt with a grounding cable complying
with UL/ETSI recommendations. The cable should include
bolt terminals on both ends, and should be securely fastened
with a nut and a star washer.

Maintenance Manual
Equipment grounding requirements

Ground each equipment unit mounted on the rack to the rack frame by means
of the retaining bolts and nuts, which are used to attach the unit to the rack
frame.
Ground equipment to the rack rails via the mounting brackets. The mounting
bracket internal surface facing the rails and the equipment must be free of paint
and provide electrical continuity to the equipment frame. Check the resistance
between any mounting bracket and the equipment frame (chassis) to be less
than 0.1 .
Where regulations require, connect each XDM-100 shelf separately to the site
grounding bar using the special grounding strip on the XDM-100 shelf bracket.
Figure 2-3: Grounding strip
Power Supply Requirements

XDM-100 shelves require two power sources with a nominal voltage of -48 or
-60 VDC. Each power source is protected by a UL-listed circuit breaker
installed in the xRAP/xRAP-100. The required circuit breakers are included in
the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment, and therefore their
current rating is in accordance with the order.
In addition, the site operator must provide a readily accessible UL-listed
disconnect device incorporated in the fixed power wiring of the site. The device
limits the maximum delivered current to a safe value.
UL Statutory Warnings and Requirements

This section outlines the UL statutory warnings and requirements applicable to
XDM-100 grounding strip platforms.

Maintenance Manual
Identification of UL listing
XDM-100 shelves are UL-listed. The following is a typical UL label.
UL overcurrent protection requirements
NOTE: Rating and type of overcurrent protection are

according to Classification Level 5 (L5) for power supplies
having output circuits that meet the requirements for SELV
circuits.
CAUTION: When replacing fuses, observe the following

precautions:
For continued protection against risk of fire, replace fuses

only with a fuse of the same type and rating
Disconnect power before changing a fuse

Maintenance Manual
UL equipment grounding requirements
CAUTION: Observe the following equipment grounding

rules (see installation instructions in Equipment Installation
(on page 3-1)):
The equipment has a connection between the grounded

conductor of the DC supply circuit and the grounding
conductor
The equipment is designed to permit the connection of the
grounded conductor of the DC supply circuit to the
grounding conductor of the equipment
The equipment must be connected directly to the DC supply system grounding

electrode conductor or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar or
bus to which the DC supply system grounding electrode is connected.
The equipment must be located in the same immediate area (such as adjacent
racks) as any other equipment that has a connection between the grounded
conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor, and also
the point of grounding of the DC system. The DC system must not be grounded
elsewhere.
The DC supply source must be located in the same premises as this equipment.
There must be no switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit
conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding
electrode conductor.
Laser Safety Requirements
Laser classification
The equipment and components with laser devices described in this manual
comply with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) safety
standards, including IEC-60825-1 Safety of Laser Products and IEC-825
Safety of Optical Fiber Communication Systems.
With specific regard to the laser, XDM-100 equipment complies with laser
product performance standards set by government agencies for Class 1 laser
products. The product and its accessories do not emit hazardous light, and the
beam is totally enclosed during all operating modes and maintenance.

Maintenance Manual
Warning labels for laser products

The following labels are affixed to the shelf front panel. The labels indicate that
the product is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product, Hazard Class 1M.
LASER KLASSE1
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
HAZARD CLASS 1M
LASER RADIATION
WHEN OPEN AVOIO
EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM
Laser safety statutory warning

All personnel involved in equipment installation, operation, and maintenance
must be aware that laser radiation is invisible. Therefore, although protective
devices generally prevent direct exposure to the beam, personnel must strictly
observe the applicable safety precautions and in particular must avoid staring
into optical connectors, either directly or using optical instruments.

Maintenance Manual
Laser device operating precautions

In addition to the general precautions described in this section, be sure to
observe the following warnings when operating a product equipped with a laser
device. Failure to observe these warnings could result in fire, bodily injury, and
damage to the equipment.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous

radiation:
During maintenance and other activities performed on

equipment using lasers, protection goggles for the
wavelength range of 1300 to 1600 nm are recommended
Hot insertion or swapping of an optical module or optical
interface module should be carried out only by authorized
personnel
During hot removal and insertion of a fiber termination,
avoid looking into the fiber to prevent irremediable
damage to your eyes
Place plastic covers on module fiber ports and fiber
terminations which are not currently in use
Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform
procedures associated with the laser device other than
those specified herein
It is strictly forbidden to interfere with any protective devices

and interlocks that are used to prevent direct exposure to the
laser beam.

Maintenance Manual
Laser information
Information regarding the various optical modules available for the XDM-100
platform is provided in the following tables.
Table 2-9: SFP transceivers laser information
Module Parameter Data

Laser I3 S3 L3 S5 L5
designation
Operating 1310 1310 1310 1550 1550
wavelength (nm)
SIM1_4/O
Source type Multimode Multimode Single Single Single
SIM1_4/OE mode mode/ mode
Multimode
SAM1_4/O Minimum mean -15 -15 -5 -15 -5
launched power
SAM1_4/OE (dBm)
Maximum mean -8 -8 0 -8 0
launched power
(dBm)
Table 2-10: 2.5 Gbps optical SFP transceivers for transponders/combiners
Operating output Mode Source type Mean launched power

wavelength (nm) (min/max.) (dBm)
OTC25_1PSxx 1466-1615 Single SLM Min: 0
Max: +5
OTC25_1AIxx 1466-1615 Single SLM Min: 0
Max: +5
OTR16_I3 1285-1330 Single SLM Min: -9.5
Max: -3
OTR16_S3 1285-1330 Single SLM Min: -5

Max: 0
NOTE: xx designates the transceivers wavelength in nm.
Table 2-11: GbE/FC/FICON SFP optical transceivers for transponders/combiners
Mode Data rate (nominal) Mean launched power

(Mbaud) (min/max) (dBm)
OT_GbE_SX Multimode 1250 Min: -9.5
Max: -3
OT_GbE_LX Single mode 1250 Min: -11
Max: -3

Protection against ESD XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Protection against ESD

This section provides guidelines regarding the protection of XDM-100
equipment and its components against electrostatic damage during handling,
packing/unpacking, transport, installation, commissioning, inspections,
servicing, and maintenance.
Electronic equipment, assemblies, and components that are sensitive to
electrostatic discharge or include sensitive items are identified by the basic
ESD warning symbol shown in the figure below.
Figure 2-4: Basic ESD warning symbol
The information appearing in this section presents generally accepted

workmanship practices and procedures that when properly applied minimize
the probability of electrostatic damage to the XDM-100 and its components.
The information provided is also in line with CENELEC Electronic
Components Committee (CECC) specification CECC 00 015, which deals with
protection of devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESDS).
Most types of electronic equipment, assemblies, and components can be
damaged by electrostatic discharges. An electrostatic discharge between two
objects occurs when an object carrying static electrical charges touches, or is
brought near enough, the other object.
Static electrical charges appear as a result of friction between surfaces of
insulating materials, separation of two such surfaces, and may also be induced
by electrical fields. Routine activities such as walking across an insulating
floor, friction between garment parts, friction between objects, and so on, can
easily build charges up to levels that may cause damage, especially when
humidity is low.
In many cases, the build-up of charge can be avoided by using special
materials; for example, garments and packaging can be made of antistatic
materials or materials that have high resistance but yet are not insulators.
The best approach to avoiding damage by electrostatic discharges includes a
combination of means and procedures that achieve the following goals:
Avoid build-up of electrostatic charges

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Protection against ESD
Maintenance Manual
Create a protected work environment that helps prevent electrostatic

discharges
Provide means for controlled discharge of any accumulated electrostatic
charges when entering the protected work environment
NOTE: An area in which ESDS can be handled with

minimum risk of damage as a result of electrostatic discharge
or fields, and in which the operator is not exposed to
additional risks, is called an ESD Protected Area (EPA).
Personnel Training
During production and assembly, equipment is handled in workspaces
especially prepared and certified to serve as a permanent EPA. However, in
many cases the environment in which the same equipment is installed or
maintained cannot be assumed to form an EPA with a permanently controlled
boundary. Therefore, all the work involving handling of unprotected ESDS
must be considered as field work.
Field work in this context includes such activities as service and maintenance,
installation, site inspections, and commissioning of components and assemblies
classified as ESDS, together with associated packing and unpacking activities.
All the staff involved in field work must be trained to perform field work in the
same way as work performed in permanent EPAs with respect to the material
quality and personal responsibilities, training, labeling, and packing.
Use of Temporary EPA

Where necessary, a temporary EPA must be used. A typical temporary EPA
arrangement suitable for field work on XDM-100 equipment is shown in the
figure below. The EPA tool kit includes:
Wrist strap with 1 M series resistor
Bonding strap with 1 M series resistor

ESD carpet (work surface), 0.25 m2 minimum
The temporary EPA must include temporary controlled work surfaces and/or
flooring capable of providing protection against ESD.

Maintenance Manual
CAUTION: The temporary EPA must be constructed in a

way that ensures electrical bonding of all the materials used,
and prevents the occurrence of any sudden changes in
potential within the EPA that could cause unacceptable
voltages or discharges to be applied to ESDS.
Figure 2-5: Typical temporary EPA arrangement

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Protection against ESD
Maintenance Manual
A means of equipotentially bonding the operator and any work surface and
flooring to ground must be used. For this purpose, the work surface and wrist
straps must be bonded either to a designated ground bonding point or to the
equipment being serviced, as shown in the above figure.
Whenever available, the mains ground will serve as the ESD grounding facility.
WARNING: While the operator is within the temporary EPA,

the minimum value of resistance used for bonding to ground
must limit the current to ground produced by voltages
accessible to the operator to limits specified as safe by the
applicable regulations (see, for example, CECC 00 015).
The same approach is applicable to the surface resistance and

resistance to ground of materials used for temporary work
surfaces and flooring.
To enable ESD bonding to ground of equipment racks and any other non-
moveable equipment containing ESDS, an ESD ground bonding facility must
be located near such equipment, or the equipment must be fitted with a
designated ground bonding point presenting a resistance to ground not greater
than 1 M.
Work Arrangements within a Temporary EPA

To ensure that effective ESD protection is indeed achieved, the following
arrangements must be observed by persons entering and/or performing field
work within a temporary EPA area:
1. All operators working within a temporary EPA area must wear, as a
minimum, an ESD antistatic protecting garment made of cotton.
2. If the extent of the temporary work area is such that the operator needs to
walk and move within that area, then the floor of the area must be capable
of providing protection against ESD.
3. The operator must be bonded to ground at all times when handling ESDS.
4. If it becomes necessary to remove an ESDS from equipment and transfer it
to a temporary work surface away from the equipment, the ESDS must be
given protective packaging unless equipotential bonding to ground of the
operator is maintained.
5. An ESDS must be placed directly into protective packaging when it is
removed from equipment. A replacement ESDS must be kept in its

Maintenance Manual
protective packaging until required for immediate installation in the

equipment.
6. The field service operator must ensure that the materials and tools
necessary to maintain and control the temporary EPA are available at the
place of the field work on service time.
7. All tools for use within the EPA must, as far as is practical, be constructed
so that they do not generate or hold an induced electrostatic charge.

3
3 Equipment Installation
In This Chapter
Overview .................................................................................... 3-2
Unpacking and Visual Inspection............................................... 3-7
Installation Options..................................................................... 3-8
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks........................................... 3-12
Installing the Air Filter ............................................................. 3-42
Installing the Shelf in the Rack................................................. 3-45
Grounding the XDM-100 Shelf ................................................ 3-46
Installing XDM-100 Cards ....................................................... 3-48
Installing XDM-100 Modules .................................................. 3-53
Installing TPU Modules............................................................ 3-63
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the XDM-100 in ETSI A racks3-69
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the XDM-100 in ETSI B Racks3-81
Installing a TPU on the XDM-100 Shelf.................................. 3-84

Overview XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Overview
This chapter provides general instructions for the installation of the XDM-100
and auxiliary equipment.
The procedures for equipment replacement and upgrades are similar to those
described for installation of the equipment, and when relevant, notes regarding
live replacement or upgrade are inserted in these procedures.
The information appearing in this chapter should be used in conjunction with
specific site installation plans in the particular customer network. If you are
interested in obtaining design or installation assistance from ECI Telecoms
Optical Networks Divisions Customer Support team, or wish to prepare a
network installation plan, contact your ECI Telecom sales representative.
The XDM-100 shelf, cards, modules, and ancillary equipment are described in
Equipment Description (on page A-1).
Preliminary Preparations
The installation procedures provided in this chapter assume that:
The sites at which the installation procedures are carried out comply with
the requirements listed in Site Requirements (see "Site Preparation" on
page 2-3)
The preliminary preparations specified in Before You Start (on page 2-1),
for example, rack installation, availability of grounding and power sources,
preparation and routing of cables, routing of traffic cables to the rack
locations, and so on, have been completed
Before you start, determine what equipment is to be installed in the rack by
referring to the site installation plan, and note the exact position of each unit (to
avoid errors, it is recommended that you mark the prescribed positions on the
rack rails using a soft pencil).

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Overview
Maintenance Manual
Equipment Installation Sequence

Each component of the XDM-100 system is supplied separately, and must be
installed in the correct sequence, according to the site plan.
A high-density installation might include the equipment illustrated in the figure
below. The different components in the illustration are described, including a
numeral indicating the step in which the component is installed, correlating to
the steps in the table below.
NOTE:
If you are not installing an FST for a particular XDM-100
shelf, it is recommended that you leave empty space in the
rack in case optical modules are added to the shelf in the
future.
If you are not installing a TPU for a particular XDM-100
shelf, it is recommended that you leave empty space in the
rack so that the protection unit can be added in the future,
if required, without interrupting operation.
CAUTION:
If additional equipment is used in the rack, a heat buffer
or a buffer plate must be installed between any such
additional equipment and the XDM-100 shelf to minimize
the transfer of heat from shelf to shelf. This heat buffer
must be purchased from ECI Telecom.
During the installation of equipment in the rack, make
sure all optical connectors are closed by protective caps.
Do not remove the cap until an optical fiber is connected
to the corresponding connector.
Several installation options are illustrated in XDM-100 Platform Options (on

page 1-4).

Maintenance Manual
Figure 3-1: Components of installation
Depending on the specific equipment being installed according to the site

installation plan, the installation of an XDM-100 system comprises the
following general stages, listed in the required order of execution:

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Overview
Maintenance Manual
Table 3-1: Outline of typical XDM-100 installation sequence
Step Procedure Section

1 Install a rack (if required) Rack Installation
2 Unpack and perform a visual inspection XDM-100 Platform Overview

(on page 1-3)
3 Install ancillary equipment in the rack, Installing Ancillary Units in
including: Racks (on page 3-12)
xRAP-100 or xRAP
Cable guide
Fiber guide for ETSI A racks
Fiber guide for ETSI B racks
Cable guiding rod (only in ETSI B
racks)
Fiber Storage Tray (FST) (optional)
Optional ODF units
Optical Patch Panel (OPP)
Note: Installation of the optional xDDF-21
channel patch panel is implemented as part
of the traffic cable routing process.
4 Install the XDM-100 shelf in the rack Installing the Optical Patch
Note: If your site installation plan includes Panel (OPP) (on page 3-40)
TPU protection, the XDM-100 is supplied
with the TPU already installed. If you
need to connect a TPU unit to an existing
XDM-100 shelf, see Installing a TPU on
the XDM-100 Shelf (on page 3-84).
5 Install the common cards in the XDM-100 Installing XDM-100 Cards (on
shelf, including: page 3-48)
FCU
ECU
MXC-100 with NVM-C flash card
6 Install the modules in the XDM-100 shelf, Installing XDM-100 Modules
including: (on page 3-53)
Aggregate modules in the MXC-100
(SAM)
Optical and electrical I/O modules
(SIM, PIM)
EISM I/O modules
SFP transceivers in optical XDM-100
modules

Maintenance Manual
Step Procedure Section

7 Install cards and modules in the optional Installing TPU Modules (on
TPU, including: page 3-63)
TC module
Single-slot TPMs
Double-slot TPMs
8 Install blank covers where I/O, aggregate,
and TPMs are not used
9 Route and connect all cables and fibers for Connecting Fibers and Cables
ETSI A racks, including: to the XDM-100 Shelf in ETSI
Power and alarm cables A racks (on page 3-69)
Optical fibers to optical modules
transceivers
Electrical interface cables to electrical
modules
Note: Includes installation of the optional
xDDF-21 channel patch panel
Electrical traffic through the TPU
Data cables to EISM modules
Timing cables
Management cables
Connecting Fibers and Cables
OR to the XDM-100 Shelf in ETSI
Route and connect all cables and fibers for B Racks (on page 3-81)
ETSI B racks including the same
procedures as above
10 In some cases, it may be necessary to Installing a TPU on the XDM-
connect a TPU unit to an existing XDM- 100 Shelf (on page 3-84)
100 shelf

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Unpacking and Visual Inspection
Maintenance Manual
Unpacking and Visual Inspection

Before unpacking, make a preliminary inspection of the shipping boxes.
Evidence of damage should be noted and reported immediately to the carrier,
the project manager, and your local ECI Telecom representative.
CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices
Proper handling and grounding precautions required
XDM-100 equipment contains components sensitive to

electrostatic discharge (ESD). To prevent ESD damage,
strictly observe all the precautions listed in Protection against
ESD (on page 2-28). Keep parts and cards in their antistatic
packaging material until you are ready to install them.
The use of an antistatic wrist strap, connected to a grounded

equipment frame or rack, is recommended when handling
cards and modules during installation, removal, or connection
to internal connectors.
Unpack the equipment on a clean, flat surface as follows:

1. Place the shipping boxes with the top upwards, cut the sealing tape using a
short knife so as not to damage the internal items and then open the top
flaps.
2. Remove the items contained in the box, and inspect each item for damage.
Check for loose parts or any visual damage to the rack, shelf, and auxiliary
equipment. Also check the integrity of all the connectors, leads, and cables.
NOTE: Do not remove plastic covers from optical connectors

until optical cables are connected to them.
3. Search the shipping boxes for any additional small items that may be
present.
4. Open each of the module and card packages for inspection, but do not
remove the modules/cards from their individual packages.
5. To protect the modules/cards against possible damage, keep them in their
protective packages until they can be inserted in the shelf.

Installation Options XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
6. Check the contents of the shipping boxes against the packing list attached
to each box. If damaged parts are detected or if any parts are missing,
notify the project manager and your local ECI Telecom representative.
Installation Options
XDM-100 shelves can be installed in 19", 600 mm depth racks. These racks
can be installed on wooden, concrete or suspended floors, or suspended from
overhead mountings. An example of an approved 19" rack, and rack
installation procedures are given in Rack Installation.
NOTE: It is recommended that XDM-100 shelves be

installed in a ETSI A rack, but they can also be installed in a
ETSI B or 19 rack without air filters, which has been
approved by ECI Telecom. For detailed rack specifications,
contact ECI Telecoms Optical Networks Division
Mechanical Department.
You can install up to three XDM-100 shelves in either ETSI A or ETSI B

racks, as shown in Typical installation of three shelves (on page 3-11).
If necessary, contact ECI Telecom's Customer Support team or your ECI
Telecom sales representative for help in meeting your specific installation
requirements.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Installation Options
Maintenance Manual
Layout of Installation in ETSI A Racks

The installation of XDM-100 shelves in an ETSI A rack may include, in
addition to the shelf itself, ancillary equipment such as: xRAP-100/xRAP,
cable guide for low-order and high-order traffic cables, fiber guide, Fiber
Storage Tray (FST), and xDDF-21 patch panel, according to the rack
installation plan. Typical installations are shown in the following figures.
Figure 3-2: Typical installation in an ETSI A rack

Installation Options XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Layout of Installation in ETSI B Racks

The installation of XDM-100 shelves in an ETSI B rack is similar to the
installation in an ETSI A rack. It differs only in the type of fiber guide used in
each rack and the cable guiding rods used only in ETSI B racks. A typical
installation of an XDM-100 in an ETSI B rack is shown in the figure below.
Figure 3-3: Typical installation in an ETSI B rack

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Installation Options
Maintenance Manual
Figure 3-4: Typical installation of three shelves in an ETSI A rack

Installing Ancillary Units in Racks XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Installing Ancillary Units in Racks

ECI Telecom offers various accessories for efficient and optimal installation of
equipment in racks. Contact ECI Telecoms Customer Support team or your
ECI Telecom sales representative if you need custom modifications to standard
items or additional items.
This section includes instructions for the installation of ancillary units. The
same units are used in both ETSI A and ETSI B racks, except for the fiber
guide, which is different for each rack type and the cable guiding rod, used
only in the ETSI B rack. The installation procedures for the units used in both
rack types are identical. The specific units you will need to install depend on
your site installation plan, and may include one or more of the following:
xRAP power distribution frame, usually located at the top of the rack:
xRAP-100 unit Installing the xRAP-100 (on page 3-13), for the
connection of up to four XDM-100 shelves on the same rack
xRAP unit Installing the xRAP (on page 3-23), for the connection of
up to two XDM-100 shelves on the same rack
Cable guide Installing the Cable Guide (on page 3-32)
Fiber guide for ETSI A racks (see "Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI A
Racks" on page 3-33)
Fiber guide for ETSI B racks (see "Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI B
Racks" on page 3-33)
Cable guiding rod Installing the Cable Guiding Rod (on page 3-34)
Fiber Storage Tray (FST), located above the XDM-100 shelf accessories,
recommended for installations with a large number of optical modules
Installing the Fiber Storage Tray (on page 3-35)
ODF units Installing ODF Units (see "Installing the ODF" on page 3-36)
Optical Patch Panel
In addition, you may need to install an xDDF-21 patch panel where PIM2_21
and PIM2_63 modules are used, and where conversion between balanced 120
and unbalanced 75 interfaces is required. The xDDF-21 patch panel can
be installed in the same rack, above the XDM-100 shelf, or in a different rack,
with a longer SCSI cable running from the PIM2_21 or PIM2_63 module in the
XDM-100 shelf to the patch panel.
Installation of the xDDF-21 patch panel is implemented as part of the traffic
cable connection procedure described in Routing and Connecting Electrical
Interface Cables to Electrical Modules (on page 3-72).

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Installing Ancillary Units in Racks
Maintenance Manual
In general, ancillary units are attached to the rack side rails by four M6 Philips
screws. No preparation is required before installation. The following sections
provide mechanical installation instructions for units that require additional
procedures. Skip sections that are not relevant to your particular application.
CAUTION: If additional equipment other than XDM-100

shelves is used in the rack, a heat buffer must be installed
between any such additional equipment and the XDM-100
shelf to minimize the transfer of heat from shelf to shelf.
Consult your ECI Telecom representative regarding the exact

heat buffer required.
Installing the xRAP-100

The installation of an xRAP-100 unit consists of the following steps:
1. Prepare DC power cables.
2. Install the xRAP-100 in the prescribed location: either at the top of the rack
or on the extendable installation rails.
3. Ground the xRAP-100 to the rack grounding stud.
4. Connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-100.
5. Connect the DC power cables of the XDM-100 shelves to the xRAP-100.
6. Install circuit breakers.
7. Check DC voltage polarity.
8. Connect the alarm cables.
For a description of the xRAP-100, refer to Equipment Description (on page
A-1).
The DC input power cables connect between the two DC power sources and the
xRAP-100 source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each
source.

Maintenance Manual
Before You Start:

Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of 35
mm2, one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a two-hole
compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment.
If appropriate leads have already been prepared at the prescribed rack location,
make sure that the leads are not connected to any live voltage source before
attaching the lugs.
To prepare a DC power cable:

1. Strip about 22 mm of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all the lead strands into the lug sleeve.
3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate
crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720
crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die,
or equivalent.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the black lead.
The xRAP-100 is attached to the rack side rails in the top position of the rack.
To install the xRAP-100:

Attach the xRAP-100 to the rack side rails in the top position, and secure it
with the four screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.

Maintenance Manual
To ground the xRAP-100:

1. Identify the xRAP-100 grounding stud (see Location of xRAP-100
grounding stud (on page 3-15)), which is located on its bottom cover.
2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements
described in Grounding Requirements (on page 2-20).
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the xRAP-100
grounding stud using a spring washer and nut.
4. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack
grounding stud.
Grounding stud
Cable support bracket
Figure 3-5: Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud

Maintenance Manual
To connect DC input power cables to the xRAP-100:

1. Before starting, identify the openings used to route power cables to the
xRAP-100 by referring to the figure below.
Figure 3-6: Identification of xRAP-100 cable routes
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover and
remove the cover.
3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board in
accordance with the figure below. This figure shows the terminals at the
source A side; the same board is used at the source B side.
Figure 3-7: Connecting DC power cables to the xRAP-100

Maintenance Manual
CAUTION: Before connecting the power leads, make sure to

identify the terminal polarity on the xRAP-100 power
terminal board.
4. Bring the two leads of one DC source input power cable to the appropriate
xRAP-100 opening.
5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on
the power terminal board.
6. Secure the lug using a flat washer, a spring washer, and a nut. Tighten the
nut with a torque of 450 to 550 N cm.
7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on
the power terminal board.
8. Repeat Step 6 for the black lead lug.
9. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for
source B.
10. Route the DC input power cables towards the cable support bracket at the
rear of the xRAP-100 (see Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud (on page
3-15)), and attach them to the bracket with cable ties.

Maintenance Manual
To connect the DC power cable for an XDM-100 shelf:

1. Before starting, identify the shelf power connectors on the xRAP-100 board
in accordance with the following figure.
2. Insert the end of the DC power cable terminating with a 3-pin D-type male
connector near the SOURCE A power connectors and connect it to
connector SHELF 1 (see above figure).
NOTE: The cable leading to connector SHELF 4 can be

connected to either the 5-pin H-POWER connector or the 3-
pin D-type connector. The cables leading to connectors
SHELF 1, SHELF 2, and SHELF 3 can only be connected
with a 3-pin D-type connector.
WARNING: It is strictly forbidden to connect two XDM-100

shelves to SHELF 4 power connectors simultaneously.
3. Fasten the screws of the D-type connector.

4. If you are connecting additional shelves to the xRAP-100, repeat the above
steps for each shelf.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat the above steps to connect the
shelves to source B.

Maintenance Manual
6. Route the DC power cables towards the cable support bracket at the rear of
the xRAP-100 (on page 3-15), and attach them to the bracket with cable
ties.
7. Route each shelf power cable along the rack side rails down to the
corresponding shelf position, then securely attach the power cable to the
rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in
accordance with its function.
NOTE: Connect the cables to the shelves only after

completing the installation of the shelves and all other
components.

Maintenance Manual
To install the xRAP-100 circuit breakers:

1. If the xRAP-100 front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover to its chassis and remove the
cover (see the figure below).
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of shelf 1

(the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the
equipment); its rating is in accordance with the ordered shelf configuration.
The recommended circuit breakers according to the XDM-100 shelf
configuration are listed in the table below.
3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the
xRAP-100 source A power terminal board, as shown in the above figure.
4. If more than one shelf is powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to
insert the other circuit breaker into the corresponding shelf position of the
power terminal board.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2, 3, and 4 for source B
circuit breakers.

Maintenance Manual
Table 3-2: XDM-100 recommended circuit breakers
Shelf type Maximum power Recommended CB

dissipation per shelf
XDM-100 basic shelf 530 W 25 A
XDM-100 with TPU 575 W 25 A
XDM-100H (hybrid) 600 W 25 A
To check the DC voltage polarity:

1. Connect the DC input power to the xRAP-100.
2. Set all xRAP-100 circuit breakers to ON.
3. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive
(pin A3) and negative (pin A2) pins of each power cable.
4. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 to -75 VDC), and
that it has the correct polarity.
5. Return all xRAP-100 circuit breakers to OFF.
6. Disconnect the xRAP-100 input power sources.
7. Reinstall the xRAP-100 front cover and fasten it using the two captive
screws.

Maintenance Manual
To connect alarm cables to the xRAP-100:

Use Identification of xRAP connectors (on page 3-18) to identify the xRAP-
100 connector functions.
1. Before starting, make sure you have all the necessary cables.
2. Connect the 68-pin SCSI connector of the facility alarm monitoring cable
to the ALARM IN/OUT connector, and then securely attach the cable to the
rack inner wall using cable ties.
3. Connect the 36-pin SCSI connector of the alarm monitoring cable intended
for shelf 1 to the SHELF 1 connector on the xRAP-100.
4. Route the alarm cables towards the cable support bracket at the rear of the
xRAP-100 (see Location of xRAP-100 grounding stud (on page 3-15), and
attach them to the bracket with cable ties.
5. Route the alarm cables along the side of the rack down to the corresponding
shelf position. Attach a tag to each connector in accordance with its
function.
6. If additional shelves are installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2, 3, 4, and 5 for
the cables serving the additional shelves. Make sure to attach identification
tags to each cable end.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the xRAP

The installation of an xRAP unit consists of the following steps:
1. Check and/or change the slide switches which route alarm inputs and
outputs.
2. Prepare DC power cables.
3. Install the xRAP in the prescribed location: either at the top of the rack or
on the extendable installation rails.
4. Ground the xRAP to the rack grounding stud.
5. Connect DC input power cables to the xRAP.
6. Connect the DC power cables of the XDM-100 shelves to the xRAP.
7. Install circuit breakers.
8. Check power wiring.
9. Connect the alarm cables.
For a description of the xRAP, refer to Equipment Description (on page A-1).
NOTE: The xRAP unit can supply power and alarm

connections for up to two XDM-100 shelves. If you are
installing more than two XDM-100 shelves on the rack, you
will need an additional xRAP.

Maintenance Manual
Checking and/or Changing Slide Switch settings

The slide switches, located on the rear side of the xRAP, are used to route the
facility alarm lines to the alarm input and output lines of the XDM-100 shelves
installed in the rack.
Before You Begin:

When the xRAP is shipped, these switches are already set as required to meet
the site planning specifications. Use the following procedure to check the
settings before installing the xRAP, and/or change the settings in accordance
with the current requirements.
Position 2
Position 3 Position 1
ALARM
7&8 5&6 3&4 1&2
321 321 321 321 SHELF
EXTERNAL ALARM / CONTROL
SHELF 1 SHELF 2 SHELF 3
SHELF 1 SHELF 2 SHELF 3 CONTROL CONNECTION

RAP
ALARM
7&8 5&6 3&4 1&2
321 321 321 321 SHELF

RAP
Figure 3-8: xRAP slide switches

Maintenance Manual
To check and/or change slide switch settings:

1. Identify the four slide switches, designated 1&2, 3&4, 5&6 and 7&8, and
their positions, referring to the figure above. Use the following table to
identify the required switch settings. For example:
Setting switches 1&2 and 3&4 to position 1 connects the inputs and
outputs 1 through 4 in the CONTROL CONNECTION connector to
inputs and outputs 1 through 4 in the EXTERNAL
ALARM/CONTROL SHELF-1 connector
Setting switch 5&6 to position 2 connects the inputs and outputs 5 and
6 in the CONTROL CONNECTION connector to the inputs and
outputs with the same numbers in the EXTERNAL
Setting switch 7&8 to position 3 connects the inputs and outputs 7 and
8 in the CONTROL CONNECTION connector to the inputs and
outputs with the same numbers in the EXTERNAL
2. Check the slide switch settings and verify that they meet the site planing
specifications.
3. If required change the switch settings to the required position.
Table 3-3: xRAP input and output alarm allocation
Slide Input and Output Switch SHELF

switch lines in CONTROL position connector
CONNECTION
1 SHELF 1
1&2 1, 2 2 SHELF 2
3 SHELF 3
1 SHELF 1
3&4 3, 4 2 SHELF 2
3 SHELF 3
1 SHELF 1
5&6 5, 6 2 SHELF 2
3 SHELF 3
1 SHELF 1
7&8 7, 8 2 SHELF 2
3 SHELF 3

Maintenance Manual
The DC input power cables connect between the two DC power sources and the
xRAP source A and source B inputs. Two cables are required, one for each
source.
Before You Start:

Each cable consists of two stranded copper leads with a cross section of 50
mm2, one red and the other black. Each lead is terminated with a two-hole
compression lug from the installation parts kit supplied with the equipment.
When the xRAP provides power to a single XDM-100 shelf, lower gage cables
may be used. See DC Power Cables (on page 2-14) for DC power cable
requirements.
If appropriate leads have already been prepared at the prescribed rack location,
make sure that the leads are not connected to any live voltage source before
attaching the lugs.
To prepare DC input power cables:

1. Strip about 22 mm of the red lead jacket.
2. Insert all the lead strands into the lug sleeve.
3. Press at two or three different points on the lug sleeve using an appropriate
crimping tool and die. The recommended tools are Panduit CT-720
crimping tool with CD-720-2 die, Klauke K18 crimping tool with D50 die,
or equivalent.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 for the black lead.
To attach the xRAP to the rack:

Attach the xRAP to the rack side rails in the top position and secure it with the
four screws, washers, and nuts supplied in the installation parts kit.

Maintenance Manual
To ground the xRAP:

1. The xRAP grounding stud is located on its bottom cover. Use the following
figure to identify it.
2. If necessary, prepare a grounding lead in accordance with the requirements
described in Grounding Requirements (on page 2-20).
3. Connect the lug at one end of the grounding lead to the xRAP grounding
stud using a spring washer and nut.
4. Connect the lug at the other end of the grounding lead to the rack
grounding stud.
Cable retainers Grounding stud
Figure 3-9: Location of xRAP grounding stud
To connect DC input power cables to the xRAP:

xRAP by referring to the following figure.
Opening for source B

input power cables Opening for source A
input power cables
Opening for shelf power

cables connecting Opening for shelf power
to source B cables connecting
to source A
Figure 3-10: Identification of xRAP cable routes

Maintenance Manual
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP front cover and remove
the cover.
3. Identify the various terminals located on the power source terminal board
by referring to the figure below. This figure shows the terminals at the
source A side; the same board is used at the source B side.
Figure 3-11: Connecting DC power cables to the xRAP
CAUTION: Before starting the connection of the power

leads, make sure to identify the terminal polarity on the xRAP
power terminals board.
4. Bring the two leads of one DC source input power cable to the appropriate
xRAP opening.
5. Attach the lug of the red lead to the positive stud terminal marked (+) on
the power terminals board (see the figure above).
7. Attach the lug of the black lead to the negative stud terminal marked (-) on
the power terminals board (see the figure above).
9. If an additional power source (source B) is used, repeat Steps 3 to 8 for
source B.

Maintenance Manual
10. Route the DC input power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of
the xRAP (see Location of xRAP grounding stud (on page 3-27)), and
attach them to the retainers with cable ties.
11. Secure the DC input power cables to the rack inner wall using cable ties.
To connect the DC power cable for an XDM shelf:

xRAP by referring to Identification of xRAP cable routes (on page 3-27).
2. Insert the DC power cable end terminated in lugs of one XDM-100 shelf
through the source A xRAP opening (on page 3-27). If two shelves are
installed in the rack, start by connecting the shelf 1 cable.
3. Attach the red lead lug of the shelf power cable to the positive stud terminal
of shelf 1 on the power terminals board, as shown in Connecting DC input
power cables to the xRAP (on page 3-27).
5. Attach the black lead lug of the power cable to the negative stud terminal of
shelf 1 on the power terminals board, as shown in Connecting DC input
power cables to the xRAP (on page 3-27).
7. Attach the grounding (shield) lead lug of the shelf power cable to the
ground stud terminal located on the xRAP side panel (see Connecting DC
input power cables to the xRAP (on page 3-27)).
8. Repeat Step 3 for the grounding lead lug.
9. If a second XDM-100 shelf is installed in the rack, repeat Steps 2 to 7 for
the shelf 2 power cable.
10. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2 to 8 to connect the
shelves to source B.
11. Route the DC input power cables towards the cable retainers at the rear of
the xRAP (on page 3-27), and attach them to the retainers with cable ties.
12. Route each shelf power cable along the rack side rails down to the
corresponding shelf position, and then securely attach the power cable to
the rack inner wall using cable ties. Attach a tag to each power connector in
accordance with its function.

Maintenance Manual
To install the xRAP circuit breakers:

1. If the xRAP front panel has not been removed, open the two captive screws
fastening the xRAP front cover to the xRAP chassis and remove the cover
(see the following figure).
Figure 3-12: xRAP circuit breakers installation
2. Identify the circuit breaker corresponding to the power circuit A of shelf 1

(the circuit breaker is included in the installation parts kit supplied with the
equipment); its rating is in accordance with the ordered shelf configuration.
3. Insert the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets located on the
xRAP source A power terminal board, as shown in the figure above.
4. If two shelves are powered from source A, repeat Steps 2 and 3 to insert the
second circuit breaker into the shelf 2 position of the power terminal board.
5. If an additional power source is used, repeat Steps 2, 3, and 4 above for
source B circuit breakers.

Maintenance Manual
To check the DC voltage polarity:

1. Connect the DC input power to the xRAP.
2. Set all the xRAP circuit breakers to ON.
3. Use a digital multimeter (DMM) to test the voltage between the positive
and negative contacts of each power cable.
The following figure identifies the functions of the power cable connector
contacts, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure 3-13: xRAP-100 shelf DC input power connectors, pin functions
4. Make sure the voltage is within the allowed range (-40 to -75 VDC), and
that it has the correct polarity.
5. Return all the xRAP circuit breakers to OFF.
6. Disconnect the xRAP input power sources.
7. Reinstall the xRAP front cover and fasten it using the two captive screws.
To connect the alarm cables to the xRAP:

Use Connecting DC input power cables to the xRAP (on page 3-27) to identify
the xRAP connector functions.
1. Before starting, make sure you have all the necessary cables.
2. Connect the 50-pin D-type connector of the facility alarm monitoring cable
to the xRAP CONTROL CONNECTION connector, and then securely
attach the cable to the rack inner wall using cable ties.
3. Connect the 25-pin connector of the alarm monitoring cable for shelf 1 to
the xRAP EXTERNAL ALARM/CONTROL SHELF 1 connector.
4. Connect the 9-pin D-type connector of the alarms indications cable for
shelf 1 to the xRAP RAP SHELF 1 connector.

Maintenance Manual
5. Route the two cables along the side of the rack down to the corresponding
shelf position. Attach a tag to each connector in accordance with its
function.
6. If you are installing additional shelves in the rack, repeat Steps 2, 3, 4 and 5
for the cables serving them. Make sure to attach identification tags to each
cable end.
Installing the Cable Guide

The cable guide should be installed just above the XDM-100 shelf. The cable
guide is supplied with two sets of rack mount brackets: one for 19 racks, and
the other for ETSI type racks. The ETSI rack mount brackets can be used for
both ETSI A and ETSI B racks.
To attach the rack mount brackets to the cable guide:

Attach each bracket to the corresponding cable guide sidewall with the four
screws supplied in the installation kit.
Figure 3-14: Cable guide
To install the cable guide in the rack:

Install the cable guide in the rack above the XDM-100 shelf and fasten it to the
side rails of the rack with four screws.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI A Racks

The fiber guide for ETSI A racks should be installed one mounting hole above
the cable guide in the rack.
To attach the rack mount brackets to the fiber guide:

Attach each bracket to the corresponding fiber guide sidewall with the four
screws supplied in the installation kit.
Figure 3-15: Fiber guide for ETSI A racks
To install the fiber guide in the rack:

Install the cable guide in the rack one mounting hole above the cable guide and
fasten it to the side rails of the rack with four screws.
Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI B Racks

The fiber guide for ETSI B racks should be installed one mounting hole above
the cable guide in the rack.
Figure 3-16: Fiber guide for ETSI B racks
The procedures for attaching the rack mounting brackets to the fiber guide and
installing the fiber guide in ETSI B racks are identical to the procedures for
ETSI A racks described in Installing the Fiber Guide for ETSI A Racks (on
page 3-33).

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Cable Guiding Rod

The cable guiding rod is installed only in ETSI B racks. It should be installed in
prescribed locations in the rack according to the rack installation plan. As
shown in the following figure, the cable guiding rod is attached to the rear rack
rail with two captive screws.
To install the cable guiding rod on an ETSI B rack:

1. Place the guiding rod in the required location in the rack.
2. Orient the rods fastening bracket on the side of the racks rear rail.
3. Adjust the rods front part to the corresponding mounting hole of the rack.
4. Fasten the guiding rod to the rear rail with its two captive screws.
Figure 3-17: Guiding rod installation

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Fiber Storage Tray

The Fiber Storage Tray (FST) should be installed 50 mm above the fiber guide.
If additional equipment is installed above the FST, such as another XDM-100
shelf, an additional 50 mm must be left free between the FST and such
equipment.
To mount an FST on the rack:

1. Attach the FST to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied
screws, washers, and nuts.
2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the
detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each shelf. When preparing the fiber,
refer also to the safety information appearing in Work and Equipment
Safety (on page 2-19).
3. Label the cables in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables.
4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports
of ETSI A rack, or the rack sidewalls in case of an ETSI B rack.
5. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to release the latch, and pull
the FST towards you to open it.
NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. Pull it again to open it
fully so that you can thread the fibers.
6. Thread the fibers into the FST, as illustrated in the figure below.
NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups inside

the FST, and fastened with Velcro strips.
7. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector.

8. Return the FST to the rack until it latches in place with a click.

Maintenance Manual
CAUTION: Make sure that all the optical connectors are

closed at all times with the appropriate protective caps or
with the mating cable connector. Do not remove the
protective cap until an optical fiber is connected to the
corresponding connector, and immediately install a protective
cap after a cable is disconnected.
The minimum bending radius of optical fibers is 35 mm.

Sharp bending of fibers may degrade the optical transmission
characteristics.
Figure 3-18: Threading optical fibers in the FST
Installing the ODF

Before starting, identify the prescribed ODF locations in the rack and then
perform the following procedures.

Maintenance Manual
To attach the rack mount brackets to the ODF:

The ODF is supplied with two sets of rack mount brackets: one for 19" and
ETSI racks, and the other for 23", 7' bay racks. The 19"/ETSI rack mount
brackets can be used for both ETSI A and ETSI B racks.
Refer to the following figure to identify the required set of rack mount
brackets. Attach each bracket to the corresponding ODF side panel with three
screws, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3-19: Attaching rack mount brackets to the ODF
To connect optical fibers to the ODF:

1. Push the button on the ODF's front panel to the left, to release the latch and
pull it towards you. The cover opens downwards.
Figure 3-20: ODF front panel

Maintenance Manual
Figure 3-21: ODF open view
2. Hold the end of the swing-out tray and pull it out to gain access to the ODF
components.
3. Open the two cover thumb nuts and remove the protective cover from the
ODF splice support.
4. Insert the external fibers cable through the protective tube.
Figure 3-22: ODF fiber routes

Maintenance Manual
5. Route the fiber ends through the cable guides as shown to the splice support
area.
6. Identify the adapter panel pigtail to be spliced to each user fiber.
7. Insert splicing sleeves over the pigtail, splice the user fiber to the pigtail,
and then slide the splicing sleeve over the splice.
8. Place the splicing sleeve in one of the slots in the splice support.
NOTE: When more than 12 fibers are connected to the ODF,

first start filling the slots of the lower splice support. After the
slots are occupied, reinstall the top splice support and
continue filling the support slots.
9. After splicing all the fibers, reinstall the protective cover removed in Step
2.
10. Push the swing-out tray back into the unit.
11. Close the ODF's front cover by pushing it up till it clicks to the unit.
12. Refer to Attaching rack mount brackets (on page 3-37) and secure the user
fibers with cable ties to the fiber fastening bracket at the rear of the ODF.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to fibers, do not tighten the

cable ties.
To install ODF units in a rack:

Install each ODF in the prescribed rack position and fasten it to the side rails of
the rack with four screws.

Maintenance Manual
Installing the Optical Patch Panel (OPP)

The Optical Patch Panel (OPP) can be installed in the same rack as the XDM-
100 or in other racks according to the site installation requirements.
To mount an OPP on the rack:

1. Attach the OPP to the rack rails and secure it using the four supplied
screws, washers, and nuts.
2. Prepare the necessary fibers according to the site cabling diagram and the
detailed cabling diagrams or tables of each shelf. When preparing the fiber,
see also the safety information appearing in Work and Equipment Safety
(on page 2-19).
3. Label the fibers in accordance with the cabling diagrams or tables.
4. Thread the optical fibers into the conduits running along the front supports
of the ETSI A rack, or the rack sidewalls in case of an ETSI B rack.
5. Push the button on the front panel of the OPP to release the latch, and pull
the OPP towards you to open it.
NOTE: The OPP has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. Pull it again to open it
fully so that you can thread the fibers.
6. Thread the fibers into the OPP, as illustrated in Threading and connecting
optical fibers in the OPP (on page 3-41).
NOTE: All optical fibers should be arranged in groups, inside

the OPP, and fastened with Velcro strips.
7. Identify the duplex connector position on the duplex connectors panel (on
page 3-41).
8. Connect each equipment fiber to the corresponding network fiber according
to the site cabling diagram and the detailed cabling diagrams or tables of
each shelf.
9. Run the fibers up to the level of the corresponding optical connector.
10. Return the OPP to the rack until it latches in place with a click.

Maintenance Manual


characteristics.
Figure 3-23: Threading and connecting optical fibers in the OPP

Installing the Air Filter XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Installing the Air Filter

Install the air filter as described in the following procedures.
Before You Start:

Before installing the air filter, the XDM-100's right mounting bracket should be
removed, and the filter frame that houses the air filter (and functions as a
mounting bracket) should be installed in its place.
NOTE: Air filters are not supported for 19" rack installations
To remove the mounting bracket:

In the procedure steps, refer to the following figure
Figure 3-24: Removing the mounting bracket
1. Open the six short screws fastening the right mounting bracket to the shelf.
2. Open the two long screws.
3. Remove the mounting bracket.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Installing the Air Filter
Maintenance Manual
To install the filter frame:

In the procedure steps, refer to the following figure:
Figure 3-25: Installing the filter frame
1. Place the spacer plate on the right side of the shelf as illustrated.
2. Place the filter frame on the spacer plate and fasten it to the shelf using the
six short screws supplied in the filter installation kit.
3. Insert two long screws from the filter installation kit as illustrated, and
fasten them to the shelf.

Installing the Air Filter XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
To install the air filter:

In the procedure steps, refer to the following figure
Figure 3-26: Installing the air filter
1. Open the two captive screws fastening the front panel to the frame, and
remove the panel.
2. Identify the filter's air intake side, indicated by two coding tabs.
3. Insert the clean filter in the frame, with the air intake side facing to the
right, and slide it forwards until its front edge is flush with the front frame
edges.
4. Reinstall the filter front panel and fasten it to the frame with its two captive
screws.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Installing the Shelf in the Rack
Maintenance Manual
The XDM-100 with an air filter installed is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 3-27: Installed air filter
Installing the Shelf in the Rack

As a standard, XDM-100 shelves are supplied empty, with no cards or modules
installed. Therefore, the installation activities covered in this section include:
Attaching the XDM-100 shelf to a rack
Grounding the XDM-100 shelf
After the activities presented in this section have been completed, the XDM-
100 shelf is ready for the installation of:
ECU, MXC-100, and FCU cards as described in Installing XDM-100 Cards
(on page 3-48)
I/O modules as described in Installing XDM-100 Modules (on page 3-53)
TPMs in the optional TPU, as described in Installing TPU Modules (on
page 3-63)

Grounding the XDM-100 Shelf XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
The first step is to install the shelf in the rack.
Before You Start:

Make sure that the DC power is not connected to the rack, and that the circuit
breakers in the xRAP/xRAP-100, if used, are set to OFF.
To attach an XDM-100 shelf to a rack:

1. Identify the prescribed position of the XDM-100 shelf in the rack in
accordance with the rack installation plan.
2. Place the XDM-100 shelf in the prescribed position using the two
stabilizing pins to hold it temporarily in place, and then fasten the shelf to
the rack side rails with four M6 screws, washers, and nuts.
3. If required, based on the site installation plan, see Installing the Fiber
Storage Tray (on page 3-35) for instructions on installing an FST above the
XDM-100 accessories.
Grounding the XDM-100 Shelf

After installation in the rack, the shelf has to be grounded.
Before You Start:

Review the grounding requirements specified in Grounding Requirements (on
page 2-20) , obtain the required materials and make sure to perform the
grounding connections in accordance with these requirements.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Grounding the XDM-100 Shelf
Maintenance Manual
To ground the XDM-100:

In the procedure steps, refer to the following figure.
Figure 3-28: Shelf and rack grounding

Installing XDM-100 Cards XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
1. Connect the rack grounding stud to the site grounding bar.

2. Connect the xRAP-100/xRAP grounding post to the rack grounding stud.
3. When NEBS compliance is required, for each XDM-100 shelf installed in
the rack connect a grounding strap from the two shelf grounding posts to
the xRAP-100/xRAP grounding post. Note that the grounding strap lug
must be inserted over both grounding posts.
Installing XDM-100 Cards

After the shelf has been installed and grounded, you can install the cards.
Before You Start:

When installing cards, make sure to carefully align the card with the shelf
guide rails. Hold the card straight during insertion and removal, and pull or
push it slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located on adjacent
cards/modules.
CAUTION: If you feel resistance when inserting cards,

immediately retract the card and then repeat the process.
Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening

card screws.
To install the FCU card:

The FCU card is installed in the rightmost vertical slot of the XDM-100.
Figure 3-29: Installing the FCU

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Installing XDM-100 Cards
Maintenance Manual
1. Check that the FCU has not been physically damaged during shipment, and
that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the FCU from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
visual inspection to detect damage during shipping. Report any problems.
3. Record the hardware version indicated on the units identification label.
4. Insert the rear end of the FCU into the card guides.
5. Push the FCU in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of the
card is flush with the front of the XDM-100 shelf. If you feel resistance
before the connectors are mated, pull the fan unit out and repeat the
procedure.
6. Secure the FCU in place by tightening the two captive screws.
To install the ECU card:

The ECU card is installed in the bottom horizontal slot. Installation is identical
for the ECU-F and the ECU cards.
Figure 3-30: Installing the ECU

Maintenance Manual
CAUTION: Take care not to change the position of the ECU

switches when inserting or removing a card. Always hold the
ECU by grasping the sides of the card, without touching any
of the internal electronics or front panel switches and
connectors.
1. Check that the card has not been physically damaged during shipment, and
2. Remove the card from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the cards
identification labels.
4. Insert the rear end of the ECU into the card guides.
5. Push the ECU in until it mates the chassis connectors, and the front of the
card is flush with the front of the XDM-100 shelf. If you feel resistance
before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.
6. Secure the ECU in place by tightening the two captive screws.
To install the MXC-100 card:

Each XDM-100 shelf must have an MXC-100 card installed in slot MXC-A.
Slot MXC-B must contain either an additional protection MXC-100 card or an
MXC-BR bridging card (for the nonredundant option).
Installation is identical for the MXC-100 and MXC-BR cards, in both slots.
Figure 3-31: Installing the MXC-100

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Installing XDM-100 Cards
Maintenance Manual
CAUTION: When replacing an MXC-100 card:

Do not extract/insert an MXC-100 card while the DC
cables are connected to it.
Never remove or insert an MXC-100 card with the
aggregate module engaged.
4. Bring both extractor handles of the card forward.
5. Insert the rear end of the MXC-100 card into the card guides.
6. If the NVM card was not installed in the MXC-100, install it as follows:
a. Check that the NVM card has not been physically damaged during
shipment.
b. Remove the NVM from its antistatic protection packaging and perform
a visual inspection to detect damage during shipment. Report any
problems.
c. Orient the NVM card against the dedicated slot on the MXC-100, and
then insert its rear end (the end with the connector) in the card guides,
and push in until it is locked in place.
NOTE: If the NVM lock is not properly fastened, there is no

access to read/write and the system emits an NVM Cardout
alarm.
d. Place the NVM cover on the slot, and fasten it with its two captive
screws.
7. Push the MXC-100 in until it mates the chassis connectors and the front of
the card is flush with the front of the shelf. If you feel resistance before the
connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.
8. Turn the two extractor handles to the horizontal position to lock the card in
place.

Maintenance Manual
9. First close the upper left screw securing the MXC-100 in place, and then
the upper right screw and the two lower screws.
NOTE: Make sure that all four screws in the MXC-100

brackets are properly tightened. Failing to do so may result in
improper operation of the shelf.
If the FAIL (red), MAIN (blue), and TMU (orange) LEDs

blink simultaneously, this indicates that the MXC-100 is not
mounted correctly or that not all four screws are properly
locked.
CAUTION: When replacing any MXC-100 card: The upper

left screw operates a microswitch that indicates to the XDM-
100 platform that the MXC-100 card is installed. This screw
must be opened first when replacing an MXC-100 card.
10. Install the required aggregate modules according to the site installation
plan, as described in Installing Aggregate Modules in MXC-100 Cards (on
page 3-54).
11. Close any unused aggregate slots with the supplied blank panel using the
four captive screws on the panel.
WARNING:
To reset the system using the RESET button, you must
first remove the NVM cover.
To extract the NVM, press the release pushbutton using
the cover as a tool.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Installing XDM-100 Modules
Maintenance Manual
Installing XDM-100 Modules

This section describes the installation process for all XDM-100 modules. For a
list and technical descriptions of all available modules, refer to Equipment
Description (on page A-1).
The installation procedure for each type of module is as follows:
1. Install aggregate modules in the MXC-100 (see "Installing Aggregate
Modules in MXC-100 Cards" on page 3-54).
2. Install I/O modules, including:
Optical and electrical modules (see "Installing Optical and Electrical
I/O Moduling Optical and Electrical I/Oes" on page 3-56)
Double-slot modules (see "Installing Double-Slot Modules" on
page 3-60)
The optical I/O and optical aggregate modules use Small Form-factor
Pluggable (SFP) transceivers. The insertion of SFPs in the module slots is
described in Installing SFP Transceivers in Optical Modules (on page 3-58).
NOTE: You can install any combination of the different

types of I/O modules in the I/O modules cage.

Installing XDM-100 Modules XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Installing Aggregate Modules in MXC-100 Cards

Aggregate modules can be installed in slots A1 and A2 of the MXC-100 card,
and in slots B1 and B2 of the protection MXC-100 card, if installed.
Before You Start:

Make sure that all the aggregate modules specified for installation in the XDM-
100 shelf in accordance with the shelf installation plan are available.
During the installation of optical aggregate modules, make sure all SFP
transceiver slots are closed by protective caps. Do not remove the cover until
an SFP is inserted (see Installing SFP Transceivers in Optical Modules (on
page 3-58)).
When inserting a module, make sure to carefully align it with the cards guide
rails. Hold the module straight during insertion and removal, and pull or push it
slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located on adjacent
modules.
CAUTION:
If you feel resistance during insertion, immediately retract
the module and repeat the process.
Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening
screws of modules.
Figure 3-32: Location of aggregate module slots

Maintenance Manual
Figure 3-33: Installing an aggregate module in the MXC-100
To install an aggregate module in the MXC-100 card:

1. Check that the module has not been physically damaged during shipment,
and that the antistatic protection bag of the original packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the module from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the modules
4. Remove the dust cover from the appropriate slot (A1 or A2 on MXC-A, or
B1 or B2 on MXC-B).
5. Push the module into the guides of the appropriate slot. Push slowly
backwards to mate the connectors until the front of the module is flush with
the front of the XDM-100 shelf. If you feel resistance before the connectors
are fully mated, retract the module and repeat the procedure.
6. Fasten the module with the two captive screws.
7. If you are installing an optical aggregate module, proceed to Installing SFP
Transceivers in Optical Modules (on page 3-58).

Maintenance Manual
CAUTION:
Never remove or insert an MXC-100 card with aggregate

modules engaged. Proceed as follows:
Disconnect the module cables/fibers and remove the

aggregate module/s.
Remove the MXC-100 card (including the NVM),
opening the upper left screw first.
Insert the new MXC-100 card, as described in Installing
XDM-100 Cards (on page 3-48).
Insert the aggregate module/s.
Installing Optical and Electrical I/O Modules

The following procedure can also be used to replace cards and modules in an
operating shelf, provided the general safety precautions listed in Work and
Equipment Safety (on page 2-19) and the module-specific warnings listed in
Equipment Description (on page A-1) for each module are strictly followed.
Before starting, make sure that all the I/O modules specified for installation in
the XDM-100 shelf, in accordance with the shelf installation plan, are
available.
All I/O modules are installed in slots I1 through I8, as shown in the figure
below. This section describes the installation of the electrical and optical I/O
modules, which are single-slot modules. The installation of PIM2_63 and
EISM modules, which are double-slot modules, is described in Installing
Double-slot Modules in the XDM-100 Shelf (see "Installing Double-Slot
Modules" on page 3-60).
In general, to facilitate easy cable routing, it is preferable to install all electrical
modules on the one side of the XDM-100 shelf (left or right), and all optical
modules on the other side. If you are employing a TPU 1:1 protection scheme,
electrical modules that have TPU protection should be arranged in pairs, one
below the other. For a 1:3 protection scheme, it is recommended that all
electrical I/O modules be installed on one side of the XDM-100 shelf, in slots
I1, I2, I5, and I6, or in slots I3, I4, I7, and I8.

Maintenance Manual
CAUTION:
When installing optical modules, make sure all SFP
transceiver slots are closed by protective caps. Do not
remove the cover until an SFP is inserted.
For your safety, to comply with electro-magnetic
compatibility (EMC) requirements and to prevent escape
of the ventilation from the fans through these openings, it
is required that you protect all unused slots with blank
panels.
Figure 3-34: Inserting an I/O module in the I/O modules cage
To install an I/O electrical or optical module in the modules

cage:
4. Identify the assigned slot, and insert the rear end of the module into the
corresponding module guides.
5. Push the module into the guides of the appropriate slot. Push slowly
backwards to mate the connectors until the front of the module is flush with
the front of the XDM-100 shelf. Make sure the two fastening screws are

Maintenance Manual
free to move backward as the module slides in. If you feel resistance before
the connectors are fully mated, retract the module and repeat the procedure.
CAUTION: When inserting modules, make sure to carefully

align it with the cage guide rails. If you feel resistance during
insertion, immediately retract the module and repeat the
process.
Hold the module straight during insertion and removal. Pull

or push it slowly and carefully to avoid touching components
on adjacent modules.
6. Fasten the module to the chassis by tightening the two fastening screws. Do
not use excessive torque when tightening the screws.
7. If you are installing an optical or mixed module with SFP transceivers,
proceed to Installing SFP Transceivers in Optical Modules (on page 3-58).
After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the
module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over all the free slots.
Installing SFP Transceivers in Optical Modules
CAUTION: During the installation of SFP transceivers in

optical modules, make sure that all optical LC connectors are
closed by protective caps. Do not remove the covers until an
optical fiber is connected to the corresponding connector.
To install SFP transceivers in optical modules:

1. Identify the prescribed position on the module, according to the site
installation plan.
2. Check that the SFP has not been physically damaged during shipment, and
3. Remove the SFP from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
4. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the SFP

Maintenance Manual
5. Remove the protective covers from the slot and from the SFP transceiver.
6. Insert the rear end of the transceiver into the slot guides, and push slowly
backwards to mate the connectors until the transceiver clicks into place. If
you feel resistance before the connectors are fully mated, retract the
transceiver and repeat the procedure.
Figure 3-35: Inserting an SFP transceiver into an I/O module
CAUTION: All slots that are not in use must remain covered.
If you have to replace a module, remove the SFP first.

Maintenance Manual
Installing Double-Slot Modules
Before You Start:

Make sure that all the PIM2_63 and EISM modules specified for installation in
the XDM-100 shelf, in accordance with the shelf installation plan, are
available.
Figure 3-36: Installation of typical double-slot modules in the shelf
Because the PIM 2_63 and EISM modules occupy a pair of slots each, before
you can install them you must first remove the guide between the pair of slots.
The procedure for removing the modules guides differs, depending on whether
you are using the two upper slots (I1&I2 or I3&I4) or the two lower slots
(I5&I6 or I7&I8).
NOTE: It is recommended to install PIM 2_63 and EISM

modules in slots I3&I4 or I7&I8 (to gain an improved
thermal margin).

Maintenance Manual
To remove a module guide from the lower row of slots:

1. Identify the module guide you are removing, and remove the upper screw
and the two lowest screws from the front of the guide.
2. Gently pull the module guide out.
Figure 3-37: Removing the module guide (lower row)
3. Identify the black anodized U-shaped metal part on the upper module guide
above the guide you have removed. Slide the black anodized part
backwards and downwards to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not allow the metal part you are removing to

touch any modules or other parts of the XDM-100 cage. This
may cause a cross-circuit and damage the modules.
Figure 3-38: Removing the black anodized metal part from the upper module
guide

Maintenance Manual
To remove a module guide from the upper row of slots:

1. Identify the module guide you are removing, and remove the two upper
screws and the lowest screw from the front of the guide.
2. Gently pull the module guide out.
Figure 3-39: Removing the module guide (upper row)
To install a double-slot module in the modules cage:

4. Identify the assigned slot and insert the rear end of the module into the
5. Push the module in until it mates the chassis connectors, and the front of
the module is flush with the front of the XDM-100 shelf. Make sure the two
fastening screws are free to move backward as the module slides in. If you
feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module out and
repeat the procedure.
6. Fasten the module to the chassis by tightening the two fastening screws.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Installing TPU Modules
Maintenance Manual
7. If you are installing EISM modules with SFP transceivers, proceed to

Installing SFP Transceivers in Optical Modules (on page 3-58).
NOTE: Only FX SFP transceivers can be inserted into FX

ports; you can insert either GbE SFP or FX SFP transceivers
into GbE/FX ports.
8. After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the
module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over all the free slots.
Installing TPU Modules

This section provides instructions for:
Installing the TC Module in the TPU Shelf (on page 3-64)
Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on page 3-65)
Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on page 3-66)
Before You Start:

Make sure that the TC module and all the TPMs specified for installation in the
XDM-100 shelf, in accordance with the shelf installation plan, are available.

Installing TPU Modules XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Installing the TC Module in the TPU

The TC module is installed in the right slot of the TPU.
Figure 3-40: Inserting the TC module
To install a TC module in the TPU:

4. Identify the assigned slot, and insert the rear end of the card into the
corresponding TC module guides.
the card is flush with the front of the XDM-100 shelf. Make sure the two
fastening screws are free to move backward as the TC module slides in. If
you feel resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and

Maintenance Manual
Installing Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU

This section describes the installation of single-slot (1:1 protection) modules.
The installation of double-slot (1:3 protection) modules is described in
Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on page 3-66).
Before You Start:

Make sure that all TPMs specified for installation in the XDM-100 system, in
accordance with the shelf installation plan, are available.
Figure 3-41: Inserting a single-slot TPM in the TPU
To install a single-slot TPM in the TPU:


Maintenance Manual
7. After inserting all the modules, check for correct installation against the
module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over any free slots.
Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU

This section describes the installation of double-slot (1:3 protection) modules.
Double-slot modules can be placed in slot pairs TPM1 and TPM2 or TPM3 and
TPM4. Before you can install a double-slot TPM, you must first remove the
module guide between the two slots.
The installation of single-slot (1:1 protection) modules is described in Installing
Single-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on page 3-65).
Before You Start:

Make sure that all the TPMs specified for installation in the XDM-100 system,
in accordance with the shelf installation plan, are available.
Figure 3-42: Inserting a double-slot TPM in the TPU

Maintenance Manual
To remove a TPM guide:

1. Identify the module guide you are removing.
2. Remove the two uppermost screws and the two lowest screws from the
front of the TPM guide.
3. Gently pull the TPM guide out.
Figure 3-43: Removing a TPM guide
To install a double-slot TPM in the TPU:


Maintenance Manual
7. After inserting all modules, check for correct installation against the
module insertion diagram. Install blank panels over any free slots.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Connecting Fibers and Cables to the
Maintenance Manual XDM-100 in ETSI A Racks
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the

XDM-100 in ETSI A Racks
In general, all electrical traffic cables, power cables, alarm cables, and data
cables should be routed along the sides of the rack. All optical fibers should be
routed through the conduits running along the front supports of the ETSI A
rack.
Figure 3-44: Routing of cables and optical fibers in an ETSI A rack

Connecting Fibers and Cables to the XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
XDM-100 in ETSI A Racks Maintenance Manual
Connecting Power and Alarm Cables
To connect power and alarm cables:

1. Route the power and alarm cables leading from the xRAP/xRAP-100 along
the side of the rack to the appropriate XDM-100 shelf (on page 3-69).
NOTE: The xRAP-100 installation procedure is covered in

Installing the xRAP-100 (on page 3-13), and the xRAP
installation procedure is covered in Installing the xRAP (on
page 3-23).
2. Connect the free ends of the power cables, in accordance with the rack
installation plan and the cable tags, to the DC power connectors on the
MXC-100 front panel as follows:
If there are two MXC-100 cards (redundancy configuration), the power
cable from Source A is connected to the POWER IN A connector of the
MXC-100 in slot MXC-A, and the power cable from Source B is
connected to the POWER IN B connector of the MXC-100 in slot
MXC-B
If there is one MXC-100 card (non-redundant configuration), both
power cables are connected to the same MXC-100 POWER IN A and
POWER IN B
3. Connect the free ends of the alarm cable, in accordance with the rack
installation plan and the cable tags, to the ALARMS connectors on the
ECU/ECU-F front panel.
CAUTION: Do not extract/insert an MXC-100 card while the

DC cables are connected to it.
Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical Modules

All optical fibers in the XDM-100 shelf are connected to the LC connectors on
the SFP transceivers in the modules.
Before You Start:

Before installing the XDM-100 shelf and modules, all optical fibers should be
routed through the conduits running along the front supports of ECI Telecoms
recommended rack. From the conduits, the fibers should be routed into the FST

(Fiber Storage Tray) above the XDM-100 shelf you are installing, and threaded
into the FST, as described in Installing the Fiber Storage Tray (on page 3-35).


characteristics.
To connect an optical fiber to an XDM-100 module:

1. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to open the latch, and pull the
FST out towards you.
2. Slowly pull the end of the appropriate fiber to release enough fiber from the
tray.
NOTE: The FST has two opening positions. The tray latches
with a click at the halfway position. If you cannot release the
fiber in the halfway position, pull the tray again to open it
fully.
3. Insert the end of the fiber in the appropriate slot of the conduit running
along the front support of the rack, and route it to the appropriate level.
4. At the desired level, lead the end through the appropriate slot of the
conduit, and pass the fiber through one of the slots in the fiber guide.
5. Bring the end of the fiber to the LC connector on the designated module.
Leave some slack to prevent stress.
6. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved
cleaning kit.
7. Remove the cover from the module connector, and connect the fiber
connector to the module connector.
8. Repeat Steps 2 through 7 for all optical modules in the XDM-100 shelf.
9. When you have finished connecting all the optical modules, gently push the
FST back into the rack until it clicks into place.

Routing and Connecting Electrical Interface

Cables to Electrical Modules
NOTE: The procedures in this section describe the

connection of traffic cables directly to I/O modules in the
XDM-100 shelf. If your installation includes a TPU
protection scheme, some of the cables will be connected to
the relevant TPM in the TPU instead of to the I/O module,
according to the site installation plan.
Connection of the I/O modules to the TPMs is described in

Connecting Electrical Interfaces through the TPU (on page 3-
75).
Connections to SAM modules are always implemented

directly and not through the TPU.
Routing and connecting multipair cables

Multipair cables are used to connect to the balanced E1 (2 Mbps) interfaces
located on the PIM2_21 and PIM2_63 electrical connection modules. One or
three pairs of cables are connected to the module, respectively.
Each cable consists of a total of 21 E1 twisted pairs per cable (transmit or
receive). The cable end connecting to the XDM-100 shelf is terminated in 2 x
50-pin SCSI male connectors.
If you are using an xDDF-21 patch panel, suitable cables should be routed from
the relevant xDDF-21 patch panel to the XDM-100 shelf location. Sufficient
length should be available to permit routing. Note that the cable must be
connected to the rear of the patch panel before it is secured in place.
To connect multipair cables to PIM2_21 or PIM2_63

modules:
1. Arrange the multipair traffic cables and route them through the cable guides
attached to the rack side rails.
2. Pull each multipair cable down to the level of the corresponding electrical
connection module.
3. Leave a spare of 20 to 30 cm of the cable, folded on top of the shelf, for
future maintenance purposes.
4. Bend the cable and thread it through the side cable guides of the rack and
through the appropriate opening of the cable guide serving the shelf, until

the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate slot. Use cable ties
as required to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
5. Use a cabling diagram of the site to associate module connectors with the
appropriate DDF connections. Cut excess cable length if necessary.
6. Connect the cable connector to the corresponding module.
CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to

secure the cable connector as this may damage the module.
7. Secure the cable connector to the module connector with the two cable
connector screws. Tighten the screws manually; if the screws cannot be
reached with your bare hand, use an adjustable-torque flatblade screwdriver
(maximum blade size is 0.6). Set the tightening torque to 40 44 N cm.
Installing an xDDF-21 patch panel
To install an xDDF-21 patch panel:

1. Route the 2 x 50-pin SCSI cables leading from the PIM2_21 or PIM2_63
module along the side of the rack to the location where the xDDF-21 patch
panel will be installed.
2. Before you install the patch panel, connect the SCSI cables leading to the
rear of the xDDF-21 patch panel. The cables are marked J1 and J2 and
should be connected to their respective connectors.
3. Leaving at least 100 mm free space above the XDM-100 shelf accessories
and below the xDDF-21, attach the patch panel to the rack rails and secure
using the four supplied screws, washers, and nuts.
4. Connect the traffic cables to the front of the xDDF-21 patch panel, and
make a note of the appropriate channels on the identification label on the
inside of the panel door.

Routing and connecting coaxial cables

Individual coaxial cables are used to connect to the interfaces located on
SAM1_4/E, SAM1_4/OE, PIM345_3, SIM1_4/E, and SIM1_4/OE modules.
Depending on the module type, up to eight cables can be connected to each
module.
As part of the site preparations, suitable cables should be routed from the
relevant High Rate DDF (if used) to the intended rack location, and connected
to the coaxial cables with DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors supplied with the XDM-100
shelf. Sufficient length should be available to permit routing the cables to the
appropriate level in the rack.
To connect coaxial traffic cables to an XDM-100 module:

1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the coaxial cables in groups
according to the designated module, and route them along the guides at the
side of the rack to the appropriate XDM-100 unit (on page 3-69).
2. Pull each coaxial cable down to the level of the corresponding electrical
connection module.
the cable guide serving the shelf, so that the cable connector is positioned at
the level of the appropriate module. Use cable ties as required to fasten the
cable to the rack side rails.
5. Cut excess cable length if necessary.
6. Connect the DIN 1.0/2.3 connector on the cable to the corresponding
electrical connection connector on the module.

Connecting Electrical Interfaces through the

TPU
The type of cable used to connect the I/O modules to the TPMs depends on the
type of I/O module being protected, as follows:
For PIM2_21 modules, 2 x 50 to 1 x 100 SCSI cables are supplied to be
connected from four different PIM2_21 modules to connectors PIM2_21
#1, PIM2_21 #2, PIM2_21 #3, and PIM2_21 PROTECT at the bottom of
the TPM2_3 module. Traffic multipair cables are connected to the DDF#1,
DDF#2, and DDF#3 connectors at the top of the TPM2_3 module.
The connection between TPM2_3 and PIM2_21 modules is shown in the
figure below (see TPM2_3 protection module (on page A-37) for TPM2_3
connectors identification).
Connections are between a connector in the TPM and the corresponding

module in the shelf, where P denotes protection and 1, 2, and 3 are for
reference purposes.
Figure 3-45: TPM2_3 to PIM2_21 protection configuration
For PIM345_3 or SIM1_4/E modules, the supplied cables enable

connection from the DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors on the I/O module to the 8W8
MAIN and PROTECT connectors at the bottom of the TPM-H_1 module.
The traffic coaxial cables are connected to the OUT/IN connectors at the
top of the TPM-H_1 module. These connections are shown in the figure
below.

NOTE: The cable used to connect PIM345_3 or SIM1_4/E

modules to the TPM-H_1 module ends with eight coaxial
cables:
When protecting a PIM345_3 module, six coaxial cables

are connected and two remain unused
When protecting a SIM1_4/OE module, four coaxial
cables are connected and four remain unused
When protecting a SIM1_4/E module, all eight coaxial
cables are connected
Figure 3-46: Connecting to a TPM-H_1 protection module
Routing and Connecting Cables to EISM

Modules
Depending on the EISM modules used in your XDM-100 shelf, data cables
with RJ45 connectors or optical fibers with LC connectors are used to connect
to the module, as described in the following procedures.
To connect RJ45 data cables to an EISM module:

1. Based on the site cabling diagram, arrange the data cables in groups
according to the designated EISM module, and route them along the guides
at the side of the rack to the appropriate XDM-100 unit (on page 3-69).
2. Pull each data cable down to the level of the corresponding EISM module.


through the cable guide serving the shelf, so that the cable connector is
positioned at the level of the appropriate module. Use cable ties as required
to fasten the cable to the rack side rails.
5. Connect the RJ-45 connector on the cable to the corresponding connector
on the EISM module.
The following procedure describes how to connect an optical fiber to an EISM

module.
Before You Start:

Prior to installing the XDM-100 shelf and modules, route all optical fibers
through the conduits running along the front supports of XDM-100s
recommended rack. From the conduits, route the fibers into the FST above the
XDM-100 shelf you are installing, and thread them into the FST, as described
in Installing the Fiber Storage Tray (on page 3-35).


characteristics.
To connect an optical fiber to an EISM module:

1. Push the button on the front panel of the FST to open the latch, and pull the
FST out towards you.
2. Slowly pull the end of the appropriate fiber to release enough fiber from the
tray.
3. Insert the end of the fiber in the appropriate slot of the conduit running
along the front support of the rack, and route it to the appropriate level.
4. At the desired level, lead the end through the appropriate slot of the
conduit, and pass the fiber through one of the slots in the fiber guide.

5. Thread the end of the fiber through the rack slots to the SFP transceiver LC
connector on the designated EISM module. Leave some slack to prevent
stress.
6. Thoroughly clean the connectors of the optical fibers, using an approved
cleaning kit.
7. Remove the cover from the SFP transceiver, and connect the fiber
connector to the SFP connector.
8. Repeat Steps 2 to 7 for all optical EISM modules in the XDM-100 shelf.
9. When you have finished connecting all the optical modules, gently push the
FST back into the rack until it clicks into place.
Connecting Timing (Clock) Cables

Timing cables are connected to the T3 and T4 connectors of the ECU/ECU-F.
Each cable is terminated in a 9-pin D-type female connector.
To connect a timing cable to the XDM-100 shelf:

1. Route the timing cables along the side of the rack to the appropriate XDM-
100 shelf (on page 3-69).
2. Pull each cable down to level of the corresponding ECU/ECU-F and bend
it, until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate timing
connector on the ECU/ECU-F.
3. Connect the free ends of the cables, in accordance with the rack installation
plan and the cable tags, to connectors T3 and T4 on the ECU/ECU-F.

secure the cable connector as this may damage the ECU.
4. Secure each cable connector using its two screws.

5. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the rack side rails.

Connecting Management Cables

The management cables are connected to the RJ-45 connectors designated
MAIN MNG and PROT MNG on the ECU/ECU-F. Each cable is terminated in
an RJ-45 plug.
If ECU cards are used, the cable from the management station must be plugged
into the MAIN MNG connector. If more than one shelf is installed, use an
external Ethernet hub to distribute management to the other shelves.
If ECU-F cards are used, and more than one shelf is installed, a daisy chain
interconnection is used to distribute management to the shelves. In this
configuration, the cable from the management station is connected to the
MAIN MNG connector of the first shelf, the PROT MNG connector of the first
shelf is connected to the MAIN MNG connector of the second shelf, and so on.
To connect management cables to the XDM-100 shelf

equipped with an ECU card:
1. Route the management cables along the side of the rack to the appropriate
XDM-100 shelf (on page 3-69).
2. Pull each cable down to level of the corresponding ECU and bend it, until
the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate management
connector on the ECU.
3. If a single shelf is installed, connect the management station cable to the
MAIN MNG connector on the ECU card.
4. If more than one shelf is installed, connect the cable from the management
station to the Ethernet hub.
5. Connect management cables from the Ethernet hub to the MAIN MNG
connector on the ECU card of each shelf, in accordance with the rack
installation plan and the cable tags.

7. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the rack side rails.

To connect management cables to the XDM-100 shelf

equipped with an ECU-F card:
1. Route the management cables along the side of the rack to the appropriate
XDM-100 shelf (on page 3-69).
2. Pull each cable down to level of the corresponding ECU-F and bend it,
until the cable connector is positioned against the appropriate timing
connector on the ECU-F.
3. Connect the management station cable to the MAIN MNG connector of the
first shelf, in accordance with the rack installation plan and the cable tags.
4. If more than one shelf is installed, connect a management cable from the
PROT MNG connector of the first shelf to the MAIN MNG connector of
the second shelf, and so on.

6. Use cable ties as required to fasten the cables to the shelves.

Maintenance Manual XDM-100 in ETSI B Racks
Connecting Fibers and Cables to the

XDM-100 in ETSI B Racks
Generally, all electrical traffic cables, power cables, alarm cables, data cables,
and management cables should be routed along the sides of the rack. They
should be passed behind the cable guiding rods, and mounted in two or three
places on both rack sides. This ensures that the cables will be kept neatly
arranged between the rack rails. All optical fibers should be routed through the
conduits running along the inner sidewalls of the ETSI B rack.
Figure 3-47: Routing cables and optical fibers in an ETSI B rack

XDM-100 in ETSI B Racks Maintenance Manual
Connecting Power and Alarm Cables

The procedures for connecting power and alarm cables to XDM-100 shelves
installed in ETSI B racks are similar to those for installations in ETSI A racks,
described in Connecting Power and Alarm Cables (on page 3-70). ETSI B
racks do not have cable supports along their sides, so cables should be routed
along the side of the rack and behind the cable guiding rods, and attached to the
rack's side rails.
Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical Modules

All optical fibers in the XDM-100 shelf are connected to the LC connectors on
the modules.
The procedure for connecting optical fibers to XDM-100 shelves installed in
ETSI B racks is similar to that for installations in ETSI A racks, described in
Connecting Optical Fibers to Optical Modules (on page 3-70). ETSI B racks
have the conduits on the sidewalls and not on the front support, and the fiber
guide is different to facilitate the routing to the location of the conduits.
Before You Start:

Before installing the XDM-100 shelf and modules, all optical fibers should be
routed through the conduits running along the inner sidewalls of the ETSI B
rack, and into the FST (Fiber Storage Tray) above the XDM-100 shelf you are
installing. The fibers should be threaded into the FST as described in Installing
the Fiber Storage Tray (on page 3-35). They should then be routed through the
fiber guide installed beneath the FST, down to the level of the equipment to
which they are connected.
Routing and Connecting Electrical Interface

Cables to Electrical Modules
The procedures for routing and connecting electrical cables to XDM-100
shelves installed in ETSI B racks are similar to those for installations in ETSI
A racks, described in Routing and Connecting Electrical Interface Cables to
Electrical Modules (on page 3-72). ETSI B racks do not have cable supports
along their sides, so cables should be routed along the side of the rack and
behind the cable guiding rods, and attached to the racks side rails.

Maintenance Manual XDM-100 in ETSI B Racks
Connecting Electrical Interfaces through the

TPU
The connection of electrical interfaces through the TPU for XDM-100 shelves
installed in ETSI B racks is identical to that of shelves installed in ETSI A
racks, as explained in Connecting Electrical Interfaces through the TPU (on
page 3-75).
Routing and Connecting Cables to EISM

Modules
The procedures for connecting cables to EISM modules in XDM-100 shelves
described in Routing and Connecting Cables to EISM Modules (on page 3-76).
ETSI B racks do not have cable supports along their sides, so cables should be
routed along the side of the rack and behind the cable guiding rods, and
attached to the racks side rails.
Connecting Timing (Clock) Cables

The procedures for connecting timing (clock) cables to XDM-100 shelves
described in Connecting Timing (Clock) Cables (on page 3-78). ETSI B racks
do not have cable supports along their sides, so cables should be routed along
the side of the rack and behind the cable guiding rods, and attached to the
racks side rails.
Connecting Management Cables

The procedures for connecting power and management cables to XDM-100
shelves installed in ETSI B racks are similar to those for installations in ETSI
A racks, described in Connecting Management Cables (on page 3-79). ETSI B
racks do not have cable supports along their sides, so cables should be routed
along the side of the rack and behind the cable guiding rods, and attached to the
racks side rails.

Installing a TPU on the XDM-100 XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Shelf Maintenance Manual
Installing a TPU on the XDM-100 Shelf

When you order an XDM-100 system with TPU protection, the shelf is
supplied with the TPU installed. The TPU comes with a fastening bracket
attached to it.
If your XDM-100 shelf does not include TPU protection, it is possible to
upgrade your system and to add a TPU cage at a later stage, provided you have
left space on the rack for this possibility. There should be at least 150 mm
space above the XDM-100 accessories (cable guide and fiber guide) to install
the TPU.
The TPU cage can be installed without disconnecting any of the XDM-100
cables and fibers, and without affecting the traffic, which is not going via the
TPU.
CAUTION: This procedure should be carried out only by a

Field Engineer who has been trained by ECI Telecom.
To install a TPU on the XDM-100 shelf:

1. Check that the TPU has not been physically damaged during shipment, and
2. Remove the shelf from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the shelfs
4. Arrange all cables and fibers leading to the XDM-100 so that they will not
be unintentionally disconnected when the TPU is inserted on the rack.
5. Open the two screws securing the protective cover of the TPU connector in
place (located at the back right corner, on the top of the XDM-100 shelf).
Remove the cover.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Installing a TPU on the XDM-100
Maintenance Manual Shelf
Figure 3-48: Removing the TPU connector cover from the shelf
6. Remove the H-connector from its protective packaging and install it on the
XDM-100 shelf.
Figure 3-49: Inserting the TPU connector onto the shelf

7. Carefully lower the TPU onto the XDM-100 shelf, taking care that the pin
guides are inserted into the slots as illustrated in the figure below.
Figure 3-50: Lowering the TPU onto the shelf
8. Insert the four supplied long screws into the appropriate holes, as illustrated
in the figure below, and secure the TPU in place.
Figure 3-51: Securing the TPU onto the shelf

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Installing a TPU on the XDM-100
Maintenance Manual Shelf
9. Insert the TC module in the TPU, as described in Installing the TC Module

in the TPU Shelf (on page 3-64).
10. Insert the TPMs in the TPU, as described in Installing Single-Slot TPMs in
the TPU (on page 3-65) and Installing Double-Slot TPMs in the TPU (on
page 3-66).
11. If the I/O modules to be protected by the TPU are already connected to
traffic cables, disconnect them.
12. Connect the TPMs to the relevant I/O modules, as described in Installing
TPU Modules (on page 3-63).
CAUTION: Insert/extract the TPU in/from an XDM-100 only

when it is empty (no TC or TPMs are assembled in it).


4
4 Commissioning Tests
In This Chapter
Overview .................................................................................... 4-2
Test Equipment........................................................................... 4-3
Site Commissioning Tests .......................................................... 4-3
SDH Commissioning Tests ........................................................ 4-7
IOP Hardware Protection Test.................................................. 4-14
Severity Assignment Test ......................................................... 4-15
Transmission Alarm Handling Tests ........................................ 4-15
Maintenance Actions Tests....................................................... 4-16
MXC Redundancy Test ............................................................ 4-16
Cisco ATA 186/Cisco2600/CallManager Test ......................... 4-17
Data Network Commissioning Tests ........................................ 4-17
Optical Network Commissioning Tests.................................... 4-20

Maintenance Manual
Overview
The commissioning tests are performed after completing the installation and
preliminary configuration of a new network. These procedures confirm that the
network has been properly installed and is operating in accordance with the
design specifications.
This chapter provides general commissioning procedures for the XDM-100,
and provides a basis for preparing tests in specific networks.
The commissioning procedures include:
Site commissioning tests, performed at the site level to ensure proper
functionality of the site
SDH commissioning tests, performed at the network level to ensure proper
SDH functionality of the integrated network
Data commissioning tests, performed at the network level to ensure proper
data functionality of the integrated network
Optical commissioning tests, performed at the network level to ensure
proper optical functionality of the integrated network
The commissioning procedures presented in this chapter include:
Test Equipment (on page 4-3)
Site Commissioning Tests (on page 4-3)
SDH Commissioning Tests (on page 4-7)
Data Network Commissioning Tests (on page 4-17)
Optical Network Commissioning Tests (on page 4-20)

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Test Equipment
Maintenance Manual
Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning procedures:
PDH transmission analyzer for testing PDH transmission performance
SDH transmission analyzer for testing SDH transmission performance
Data transmission test equipment for testing GbE transmission performance
Optical power meter (OPM)
Optical spectrum analyzer (recommended for measurements at points
carrying multiple wavelengths, for example, inputs and outputs of optical
amplifiers)
Optical BER tester
Set of optical attenuators with various values
Variable optical attenuator
FC-to-LC and FC-to-SC adapters
FC/FC optical patch cords
Multimeter
Suitable equipment is available from a wide range of manufacturers, and
therefore no specific test equipment models are listed. You can use any
equipment that meets the applicable international standards and has satisfactory
measurement accuracy over the range of operating parameters and
environmental conditions that apply to the specific network. If necessary,
contact ECI Telecom's Field Engineering Department for specific
recommendations.
Site Commissioning Tests

The site commissioning tests verify the normal operation of XDM network
elements. Perform the following procedures on each network element at each
site:
Verification of cards and modules installed in each shelf
Visual inspection and mechanical checks
Optical level measurements (see reference data in the XDM System
Specifications manual)

Site Commissioning Tests XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Checking Cards and Modules Installed in Each

Shelf
This check is performed to confirm that the required cards and modules have
been installed in each site, and to record their firmware versions and serial
numbers.
The table below provides a typical form for recording the cards and modules
installed in an XDM-100 shelf.
Table 4-1: Card and module inventory
Card/module Slot Boot version Serial number

type
NOTE: Make sure that the boot version of each card and
module matches the embedded version.
NOTE: If the equipment is already connected to a

management station, use the Inventory window to collect the
information and print the relevant data. Refer to the ECI
Telecom management system users manual for detailed
instructions.
Visual Inspection and Mechanical Checks

The visual inspection checks for proper equipment installation, correct routing
and connection of cables, and other tasks related to equipment installation:
Equipment Installation (on page 3-1) provides the criteria for proper
equipment installation
The site cabling diagram provides the criteria for proper cabling routing
After completing the visual inspection tasks (items 1 to 9 in table Visual
inspection and mechanical check), power up the XDM-100 shelves to perform

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Site Commissioning Tests
Maintenance Manual
an additional set of acceptance tests (items 10 to 13 in table Visual inspection

and mechanical check). These tests check the functions needed for continuing
the execution of the network commissioning tests. Use Equipment Description
(on page A-1) for a description of the various card indicators and their
functions.
The following table provides a typical list for recording the results of a visual
inspection and mechanical check.
Table 4-2: Visual inspection and mechanical check
No. Description of inspection/check Results

1 Check mechanical mounting of the rack
2 Install the DC power cable (main fuse to
xRAP/xRAP-100;
xRAP/xRAP-100 fuse to shelf)
3 Ground the cable connections
4 Install and route 2, 34, 45, 155 Mbps tributary cables
between the shelf connector panel and the DDF
5 Install, connect, and route 622 Mbps, 2.5 Gbps optical
interface fibers to the ODF
6 Install the DDF and connect the cables
7 Install the ODF and connect the cables
8 Install the network manager station (if applicable)
9 Unpack the cards and insert them into the shelves
10 Provide DC supply voltage via the first DC source to the ___V
xRAP/xRAP-100
(-40V to -75V)
11 Provide DC supply voltage via the second DC source to ___V
the xRAP/xRAP-100 (-40V to -75V)
12 Power up the shelves
13 Check the proper operation of both xRAP/xRAP-100
power sources by disconnecting one source at a time
14 Check the communication between the shelf and the
eCraft via the shelf SLIP interface
15 Check the proper operation of all FCUs
16 Check LED operation by pressing the LED TEST
pushbutton on the ECU
17 Check the installation of Cisco ATA-186/Cisco
2600/Call Manager (if applicable)
18 Check slot assignment for all relevant cards
19 Check that there are no abnormal alarms

Site Commissioning Tests XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Measuring Optical Levels

These measurements check optical signal levels at the various equipment ports.
Before performing any other commissioning test, proper optical levels, within
the limits specified in the XDM System Specifications, must be achieved for
each optical component.
Perform these measurements using an optical power meter (OPM) configured
according to the wavelength at the measurement port. For reliable
measurement, do not connect the OPM directly to a port but use a 2-meter
cable. When measuring high optical power levels, use attenuators to ensure that
the power does not exceed the maximum OPM input level.
The following table provides a typical data form for recording the results of the
optical level measurements.
Table 4-3: Measured optical levels
Slot Module Port Wavelength Optical transmit Receive level

type level (dBm) (dBm)
The measured power levels are evaluated as follows:

The measured power must be within the range of minimum and maximum
levels specified in the XDM System Specifications for the transceiver plug-
in type installed on the corresponding port
The measured power must be within the expected range according to the
optical network plan
If necessary, contact ECI Telecom's Field Engineering Department for relevant
port and optical transceiver plug-in specifications and network planning data.
An OK result means that the port meets both criteria.
It is usually sufficient to measure the optical levels only at the transmit and
receive ports of I/O cards, transponders, and optical amplifiers installed in each
shelf. A good port receive level indicates that the components in the optical
path up to that port are properly connected and operating normally. If the result
is not satisfactory, perform additional measurements at all the other ports along
the optical signal paths.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and SDH Commissioning Tests
Maintenance Manual
Shelf Power-Up Test Procedure
To power up the NE:

1. Perform slot assignments for all the relevant cards and modules in the shelf.
2. Turn the shelf circuit breaker off.
3. After 30 seconds, turn the shelf circuit breaker on.
The equipment should automatically return to normal operation, without user
intervention and without any abnormal alarms in the system.
SDH Commissioning Tests

These commissioning tests check that SDH functionality is in accordance with
the system specifications.
Test Equipment Setup

The SDH tests are performed using a PDH analyzer, optical power meter, and
variable attenuators. Configure the optical power meter according to the
measured wavelength.
The test conditions for the various interfaces are described in the following
sections.
2 Mbps tests
For 2 Mbps tributaries, configure the test equipment as follows:
Framing Unframed
Coding HDB3
Pattern 2*10-15 PRBS
Signal rate 2 Mbps
Timing Received clock
Inject error Code error

SDH Commissioning Tests XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
34 Mbps tests
Framing Unframed
Coding HDB3
Signal rate 34 Mbps
45 Mbps tests
Framing Unframed
Coding 45 Frame = C-bit
X-bit =11
Signal rate 45 Mbps
SDH tests
For SDH tests, configure the test equipment according to the interface type
being tested, as follows:
Signal rate STM-1, STM-4, or STM-16
Mapping Any mapping (preferably bulk)
Framing Off

Maintenance Manual
Network Timing Synchronization Test

This test checks that the XDM NEs synchronize properly and switch to the next
priority clock source when a failure occurs.
To perform the network timing synchronization test:

1. Define one NE as the (internal) timing source to which all other NEs are
synchronized. (This test can be done with an external timing source, if
requested.)
2. Define several priorities for the timing source.
3. Disconnect the Rx fiber connected to the NE that has been defined as the
main timing source.
4. If the NE has two or more timing sources, it synchronizes to the second
priority source, and an alarm is generated for the missing main timing
source.
5. If the NE has only one timing source, the NE timing is set as hold-over,
and an alarm is generated for the main timing source.
LOS Detection Test

This test verifies that the XDM NEs recognize alarms and send the alarm
notification to the management system for viewing.
To perform the LOS detection test:

1. Create the NEs and links through the management system.
2. Disconnect the Rx optical fiber from one of the modules; a LOS (Loss of
Signal) alarm at the SPI level of this module port appears, together with
other alarms generated by the disconnection.

Maintenance Manual
Input Sensitivity Test

This test verifies that the input sensitivity of the XDM-100 optical modules is
according to specification.
To perform the input sensitivity test:

1. Create one unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs. Connect test
equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the
relevant endpoint ports).
2. Connect a variable optical attenuator to one of the fibers of the relevant
trail, and set the attenuator to 0 dB.
3. Increase the attenuation gradually until the test equipment displays a burst
of errors.
4. Connect an optical power meter to the first Rx point after the variable
optical attenuator and measure the total power; the measured optical power
level is the input sensitivity of the module.
5. Verify that the results are in accordance with the XDM System
Specifications.
Equipment Power Up Test

This test verifies that the XDM NEs continue operating properly after a power
break, without operator involvement.
To perform the equipment power up test:

2. Shut off the power to one of the non-gateway NEs within the relevant trail;
errors and an AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) alarm appear in the test
equipment. After approximately seven minutes, an "NE disconnected"
alarm appears in the management current alarm list, and the NE icon turns
gray (no communication).
3. Power up the NE and wait for it to perform initial download to all
cards/modules in the shelf. (This can take 20 minutes.) Verify that the NE
is connected to the management station and that there are no relevant
alarms in the test equipment or at the management station.

Maintenance Manual
Traffic Stability Test

This test verifies that traffic operates according to ITU-T standards.
To perform the traffic stability test:

2. Run this test for the appropriate time interval according to the table below.
3. Verify that no alarms appear in the test equipment or at the management
station. You should achieve an error free rate of 1 x 10-11 for 2 Mbps and 1 x
10-12 for all other rates.
Table 4-4: Traffic stability test time intervals
2 Mbps 34/45 Mbps STM-1/VC-3 STM-4/ VC-12 STM-16/ VC-48

14 hours 7 hours 120 min 30 min 8 min
Path Protection and Nonretrieval Test

This test verifies that SNCP traffic operates properly when a failure occurs.
To perform the path protection and nonretrieval test:

1. Create one protected trail of any rate between two NEs. Connect test
2. Disconnect one of the fibers in the active path of the trail; short alarm
bursts of less than 50 ms appear in the test equipment, and the management
station reports an alarm in the active path of the trail.
3. Verify that the trail works properly on the protection path.
4. Reconnect the optical fiber; the trail remains on the protection path
(non-retrieve mode), and there is no alarm in the test equipment.

Maintenance Manual
MSP Test
This test verifies that MSP traffic in the XDM network operates properly when
a failure occurs.
MSP can be applied in a point-to-point configuration.
To perform the MSP test:

2. Disconnect one of the fibers in the active path of the trail; short alarm
bursts of less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment, and the
management station reports an alarm in the active path of the trail.
3. Verify that the trail works properly on the protection path.
4. Reconnect the optical fiber; the trail remains on the protection path.

Maintenance Manual
MS-SPRing Test
This test verifies that the MS-SPRing traffic operates properly when a failure
occurs.
This procedure uses a SAM-16 module and an MXC card.
To perform the MS-SPRing test:

1. Define the ring as MS-SPRing Node Links - East and West clockwise.
3. Disconnect one of the fibers in the path of the trail; short alarm bursts of
less than 50 msec appear in the test equipment, and the trail switches to the
protection path.
4. The management station reports an alarm in the active path of the trail and
LOS alarms related to the disconnected fibers. The trail operates properly
after switching to the protection path.
5. Reconnect the optical fiber; the alarms related to the disconnected fibers
clear.
6. After the retrieve time (user-definable), the trail switches back to the main
path, and short alarm bursts of less than 50 ms appear in the test equipment.
After switching back to the main path, the trail operates properly.

IOP Hardware Protection Test XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
IOP Hardware Protection Test

This test verifies that the traffic defined on a card with hardware protection
operates properly when a failure occurs.
To perform the IOP hardware protection test:

1. Using at least one module that has hardware protection, create one
unprotected trail of any rate between two NEs. You can use a module that
has the trail passing through it (for example, SIM) or ending on it (for
example, PIM).
2. Connect test equipment to one NE and perform a loopback at the other NE
(in the relevant endpoint ports).
3. Extract the protected (working) module; short alarm bursts of less than 50
ms appear in the test equipment, and the management station reports an
alarm on the trail.
4. Verify that the trail works properly via the protection (standby) module; the
orange protection LED on the relevant TPM lights.
5. Reinsert the protected (working) module; after five minutes (system default
- can be changed), the traffic reverts back to the protected module. Short
alarm bursts of less than 50 ms appear in the test equipment, and the
management station reports no alarm on the trail.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Severity Assignment Test
Maintenance Manual
Severity Assignment Test

This test, which is performed on one XDM NE, determines the level of urgency
accorded to each alarm and creates an alarm handling protocol.
When a fault is detected or removed, the NE updates the status of the LEDs and
reports the alarm activation or clearing to the management station.
To perform the severity assignment test:

1. Extract an NVM card from the MXC card; an NVM 'Card Out' alarm of
Major severity appears on the management station.
2. Reinsert the NVM card; the 'Card Out' alarm on the management station
clears.
3. Change the severity of the 'Card Out' alarm for the NVM card to Minor.
4. Extract the NVM card; an NVM 'Card Out' alarm of Minor severity appears
on the management station.
5. Reinsert the NVM card; the 'Card Out' alarm on the management station
clears.
Transmission Alarm Handling Tests

This test verifies that the XDM NEs can recognize an alarm and send an alarm
notification to the management system, and that the management system
displays it properly.
This procedure tests the following alarms: PDH-LOS, PDH-AIS, and SPI-LOS.
To perform the transmission alarm handling test:

2. Disconnect the Tx cable of the test equipment; the management station
reports a LOS alarm for the relevant PDH port.
3. Set the test equipment to transmit AIS (AIS = on); the management station
reports an AIS alarm for the relevant PDH port.
4. Disconnect the Rx fiber of an optical port; the management station reports a
LOS (SPI-LOS) alarm for the relevant optical port.
If ALS = off, the management station reports a far-end optical port MS-
RDI or Line-RDI alarm.

Maintenance Actions Tests XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
If ALS = on, the management station reports a far-end optical port LOS
alarm.
Maintenance Actions Tests

This test verifies that maintenance actions can be performed in the XDM NEs
using the management system.
This procedure tests a near-end loopback, forced PDH AIS, forced low-rate
RDI, forced high-rate RDI, and forced MS-RDI.
To perform the maintenance actions test:

2. Perform a near-end loopback at the other trail endpoint.
3. Using the management station, execute a forced AIS on the PDH port that
connects to the test equipment; the PDH test equipment detects an AIS
alarm.
MXC Redundancy Test

This test verifies that the backup MXC operates properly and that database is
not lost when a failure occurs.
To perform the MXC redundancy test:

2. Select an NE that passes the trail, and extract the MXC card at slot A
(upper); neither the test equipment nor the management station detect a
traffic alarm, but a Card Out alarm for the MXC card appears in the
management.
3. After several minutes, the NE disconnects from the management station
(turns gray), and then reconnects to the management with the same
database (switches to the redundant MXC). The Info windows of both
MXCs display the correct status.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Cisco ATA
Maintenance Manual 186/Cisco2600/CallManager Test
Cisco ATA 186/Cisco2600/CallManager

Test
This test verifies that the Voice Over IP network operates properly.
To perform the Cisco ATA 186/Cisco2600/CallManager test:

1. Select two sites with Cisco ATA 186, and dial from site A to site B; the
Cisco ATA 186 in site B rings.
2. Pick up the Cisco ATA 186 handset at site B; the two speakers, at site A
and B, can talk to each other via the Cisco ATA 186 without noise
interference.
Data Network Commissioning Tests

The data network commissioning tests check that data functionality is in
accordance with system specifications.
Throughput and Latency Tests

These tests determine the time it takes to transmit frames through the network
and the maximum amount of data that can pass through the network before
frames are lost.
To perform the throughput and latency tests:

1. Create two unprotected trails of any rate between two NEs in the network.
2. Connect test equipment to both ports of one NE and connect a cross cable
on both ports of the other NE.
3. Configure the test equipment for RFC-2544 throughput and latency
measurement.
4. Measure the throughput and latency for frame sizes 64, 128, 256, 512,
1024, 1280, and 1518 bytes, and record the results in the appropriate table.

Data Network Commissioning Tests XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
NOTE:
Measured latency is for both the forward and return paths.
For a single path, the latency will be 50% of the measured
value.
The latency test is dependant on the throughput results.
For example, if 10 Mbps is tested and the throughput is
4%, the latency test should be for 4 Mbps (2*VC-12=4
Mbps).
Inject traffic according to the assigned bandwidth (VC-12
= 2.048 Mbps).
Table 4-5: Throughput and latency test results
LAN port & 64 bytes/ 128 256 512 1024 1280 1518
speed frame bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/
frame frame frame frame frame frame
Throughput
Latency
Frame Loss Rate Test

This test determines the number of frames that are lost when the system is
overloaded.
To perform the frame loss rate test:

1. Create two unprotected trails of any rate (for example, 10/100 Mbps or
1 Gbps) between two NEs.
on both ports of the other NE (in the relevant endpoint ports).
3. Configure the test equipment for RFC-2544 for frame loss measurements;
set to 100%.
4. The frame loss rate in % is defined according to the following formula:
[(input fps) - (output fps)] * 100 / (input fps) fps=frame per second

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Data Network Commissioning Tests
Maintenance Manual
For example, for a 100 Mbps test using 5*VC-12=10 Mbps, with input
fps=148810 and the output fps=14881; the frame loss is:
148810-14881=133929, which represents 90% loss.
Table 4-6: Frame loss rate test results
Frame size 64 bytes/ 128 256 512 1024 1280 1518

frame bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/ bytes/
frame frame frame frame frame frame
Frame rate
(% MFR)
100%
System Recovery and Reset Tests

These tests determine the speed at which a device recovers from a buffer
overflow condition and from a power failure.
To perform the system recovery and reset tests:

3. Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the port rate
and for any frame size.
4. Power off one of the NEs, and verify packet loss in the test equipment.
5. Turn on the NE, wait 2 minutes, and verify that the errors in the test
equipment have cleared.

Optical Network Commissioning XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Tests Maintenance Manual
Stability Test
This test determines the stability of the network by checking that it can
function with no errors for a defined period of time.
To perform the stability test:

3. Configure the test equipment for manual testing according to the port rate
and for any frame size.
4. Run this test for 2 hours, and verify that no errors appear in the test
equipment.
Alarm Handling Test

This test checks the alarm conditions forced on the NE and the subsequent
action carried out by the NE. It tests signal loss to both the data LAN port and
to the optical interfaces.
To perform the alarm handling test:

1. Create two trails of any rate (for example, 10/100 Mbps) between two NEs.
3. Disconnect the test equipment to create a signal loss to the data LAN port;
this generates a 10/100 Mbps - Link Down alarm (only if VLAN is
created).
4. Disconnect the optical cable to create a signal loss to the optical interface;
this generates an SPI LOS alarm on the optical interface.
Optical Network Commissioning Tests

The optical network commissioning tests verify normal network operation.
Perform these tests only after the entire network is complete.
These tests are applicable to XDM-100H (for information about this option, see
XDM-100H (on page B-1)).

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Optical Network Commissioning
Maintenance Manual Tests
Test Setup and Required Test Equipment

Optical network commissioning tests check the performance of transmission
paths within the network. To perform these tests, use an optical spectrum
analyzer, optical power meter, variable attenuator, and optical BER tester.
Configure the BER tester to operate at the transponder transmission rate (for
example, STM-16 when connected to a CTRP25).
The figure below shows the test setup for the optical commissioning tests.
Optical
loopback
TX T
TX
BER
tester R
RX P RX
Attenuator
Mux Demux
TRP ...........
...........
TX
BER
tester
RX
Variable ...........
attenuator ...........
Demux Mux
Figure 4-1: Optical commissioning tests setup

Optical Power Measurement Test

This test verifies that all optical cards/modules and all optical links are
operating according to the optical power budget plan and XDM specifications.
To perform the optical power measurement test:

1. Using an optical power meter, measure the output and input optical levels
for each optical module in every NE.
2. Record all optical measurements in the optical power budget plan (Excel
file).
3. Using a spectrum analyzer, measure the composite signal, power per
channel, OSNR, and gain tilt for every optical link; these measurements are
required for every active and passive optical component in the link - mux,
demux, OADM, booster, pre-amplifier, and in-line.
4. Record all optical measurements in the optical power budget plan (Excel
file).
Equipment Power Up Test

This test verifies that the XDM NEs continue operating normally after a power
break, without operator involvement.
To perform the equipment power up test:

1. On one of the optical paths in the network, connect test equipment to one
NE and perform a loopback at the other NE (in the relevant TRPs).
2. Shut off the power to one of the non-gateway NEs within the relevant
optical path; an alarm appears in the test equipment and the management
station.
3. After approximately seven minutes, an "NE disconnected" alarm appears in
the management current alarm list, and the NE icon turns gray (no
communication).
4. Power up the NE and wait for it to perform initial download to all cards in
the shelf. (This can take up to 20 minutes.)
5. Verify that the NE is connected to the management station and that there
are no alarms related to the relevant optic path in the test equipment or at
the management station.

LOS Detection Test

This test verifies that the XDM NEs recognize alarms and send the alarm
notification to the management system for viewing.
To perform the LOS detection test:

Disconnect the Rx optical fiber from one of the optical module; a LOS
alarm at the SPI level of this module port appears, together with other
alarms generated by the disconnection.
Input Sensitivity Test

This test verifies that the input sensitivity of the XDM optical cards/modules is
according to their technical specification.
To perform the input sensitivity test:

2. Connect a variable optical attenuator to one of the fibers of the relevant
path; set the attenuator to 0 dB.
3. Increase the attenuation gradually until the test equipment displays a burst
of errors.
4. Connect an optical power meter to the first Rx point after the variable
optical attenuator and measure the total power; the measured optical power
level is the input sensitivity of the module.

Path Protection Test

This test verifies that the protected traffic operates properly when a failure
occurs.
To perform the path protection test:

1. On one of the protected optical paths in the network, connect test
relevant TRPs).
2. Disconnect one of the fibers in the active path of the optical channel; short
alarm bursts of less than 50 ms appear in the test equipment and
management station.
3. Verify that the optical channel works properly on the protection path.
4. Reconnect the optical fiber; the optical channel remains on the protection
path (non-retrieve mode), and no alarm appears in the test equipment.

Maintenance Action Handling Test

This test verifies that maintenance actions can be performed in the XDM NEs
using the management system. This procedure tests a manual switch, forced
switch, and switch lockout.
To perform the maintenance action handling test:

1. On one of the protected optical paths in the network, connect test
relevant TRPs).
2. From the management system, perform a manual switch; short alarm bursts
of less than 50 ms appear in the test equipment.
3. Verify that the optical channel works properly on the protection path.
4. Disconnect the line input of the nonactive TRP from the mux.
5. From the management system, perform a manual switch; short alarm bursts
of less than 50 ms appear in the test equipment.
6. Verify that the optical channel works properly on the main path.
7. Disconnect the line input of the nonactive TRP from the demux.
8. From the management system, perform a manual switch; the optical
channel switches to the protected path, and a LOS alarm appears in the test
equipment.
9. From the management system, perform a switch lockout on the nonactive
TRP.
10. Disconnect the line input of the active TRP from the demux; the optical
channel does not switch to the protected path, and a LOS alarm appears in
the test equipment.

BER and Stability Test

This test verifies that the optical channels in the XDM optical network operate
without errors (according to ITU-T standards).
To perform the BER and stability test:

2. Run this test for the appropriate time interval according to the table below.
3. Verify that no alarms appear in the test equipment or at the management
station; you should achieve an error free rate of 1 x 10-12.
Table 4-7: BER and Stability Test time intervals
Rate STM-1 STM-4 STM-16

Time period 120 min 30 min 8 min

5
5 Maintenance
In This Chapter
Overview .................................................................................... 5-1
Required Test Equipment, Tools, and Materials ........................ 5-1
Preventive Maintenance ............................................................. 5-2
Traffic Monitoring System ......................................................... 5-6
Onsite Troubleshooting ............................................................ 5-12
Replacing Cards and Modules .................................................. 5-22
Replacing xRAP/xRAP-100 Components................................ 5-31
Overview
This chapter provides maintenance procedures for XDM-100 equipment.
Personnel involved in maintenance must be thoroughly familiar with safety
issues as described in Before You Start (on page 2-1).
Required Test Equipment, Tools, and

Materials
For most maintenance activities described in this chapter, only an eCraft
terminal and a multimeter are required. If you need to make measurements, it is
recommended to use equipment of the same type and models used for
commissioning tests (see list in Commissioning Tests (on page 4-1)). The tools
and materials necessary for equipment installation must also be available
during maintenance.

Preventive Maintenance XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Preventive Maintenance
The purpose of the preventive maintenance activities is to keep the XDM-100
hardware in good condition, and detect and correct as soon as possible any
condition that may lead to deterioration and equipment malfunction.
Record the execution of the various activities and their results according to the
procedures used in your organization.
Table 5-1: Preventive maintenance inspection and checks
Item Inspection/Check Intervals*

W M Q
1 Visually inspect the condition of cables and fibers. Check for X
correct routing (no sharp bends) and proper support to avoid
stress. Avoid touching fibers during the inspection, except as
required to correct problems.
2 Inspect equipment racks and cases, connection terminals, X
grounding, and so on, and pay special attention to any signs of
corrosion.
3 Check condition of rack front doors and RFI fingers. Clean as X
necessary with approved cleaning agents.
4 Whenever applicable, inspect ancillary equipment (air X
conditioners, lighting, distribution panels, and so on) and their
power sources.
5 Check that all unused optical connectors are covered by X
protective covers. Add covers as necessary.
6 Check that cards and modules are securely attached: all extractor X
handles must be in the storage position (parallel to the card edge),
and all module fastening screws must be tight (tighten only
manually).
7 Check for proper operation of the FCU (no abnormal noise and X
vibrations) in all NEs.
8 Check that the FCU is fully inserted in its chassis position and X
that its screws are tight.
9 Clean the FCU and inspect the air filters. Clean or replace the air X
filters if necessary.
10 Clean all areas around the XDM-100 shelf in the rack and the X
rack's front door (if applicable), using a vacuum cleaner.
11 Check that the cables connecting the DC power sources (main X
and backup) to the xRAP or xRAP-100 are properly connected.
12 Check that the external alarm cables are properly connected to X
the xRAP or xRAP-100.
13 Check that there are no alarm indications on the cards and X
modules.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Preventive Maintenance
Maintenance Manual
Item Inspection/Check Intervals*

W M Q
14 Check that all xRAP or xRAP-100 LEDs turn on and that the X
buzzer sounds while the POWER ON pushbutton on the xRAP or
xRAP-100 panel is pressed.
Note: The buzzer will not sound if the ACO (Alarm Cut-off) is
active.
15 Check that all card and module LEDs turn on when the LED X
TEST pushbutton on the ECU panel is pressed.
16 Perform a visual check of LED indications X
17 Check the proper operation of the OW (OrderWire) system (if X
applicable) in each NE.
*Legend: W weekly M monthly Q quarterly
Air Filter Preventive Maintenance
Maintenance Intervals
Air particles trapped by the air filter increase the resistance to airflow, and can
eventually decrease the airflow below the minimum required for proper cooling
of internal components. The resulting increase in the internal temperature of the
equipment decreases the equipment reliability and performance. Therefore,
whenever an air filter is installed, it must be periodically cleaned, or replaced
with a clean filter.
It is accepted throughout the electronics equipment industry to recommend
cleaning or replacing air filters approximately every 90 days. However, the
cleaning intervals depend on the specific environmental conditions, and
therefore in dusty environments more frequent cleaning is required. Note that
foam filters, which are the type used in XDM-100 shelves, efficiently trap
particles without showing face loading of contaminants, and therefore visual
inspection cannot be used to determine cleaning intervals.
CAUTION: Filter cleaning intervals must be strictly

observed, as clogging by trapped particles can severely
impair equipment reliability and performance.

Preventive Maintenance XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Recommended Cleaning Methods

The following methods (listed in ascending cleaning efficiency) can be used to
clean air filters:
1. Vacuum Clean: A few passes of a vacuum cleaner will remove
accumulated dust and dirt in seconds. Point the air nozzle in the direction of
operating airflow (vacuum from the intake side toward the exhaust side).
Oily residues and moisture will however reduce the cleaning efficiency, in
such case clean the filter using method No.4, or replace the filter.
2. Blow with Compressed Air: Point compressed air nozzle in opposite
direction of operating airflow (blow from exhaust side toward intake side).
NOTE: Oily residues and moisture will reduce the cleaning

efficiency of the two dry methods listed above.
3. Cold Water Rinse: Under normal service conditions, the foam media used
in the filters installed on XDM-100 shelves require no oily adhesives.
Therefore, collected dust and dirt can be washed away using just a standard
hose nozzle with plain water. Let stand until completely dry and free of
moisture, and return to service.
4. Immersion in Warm, Soapy Water: Where stubborn airborne dirt is
present, the filter may be dipped in a solution of warm water and mild
detergent. Then simply rinse in clear water, let stand until completely dry
and free of moisture, and return to service.
The recommended method is No. 4, as it ensures thorough cleaning of all types
of contaminants under any reasonable service conditions.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Preventive Maintenance
Maintenance Manual
Cleaning the Filter

For the procedure steps, refer to the following figure
Figure 5-1: Installing the air filter
NOTE: The air filter can be removed and reinstalled while

the XDM-100 shelf operates.
To clean the air filter:

1. Release the two captive screws fastening the filter front panel, and remove
the panel. Keep the panel in a safe place until it can be reinstalled.
2. Pull the filter out.
3. Inspect the filter for damage. If any damage, for example, holes, torn
material, etc., is evident, replace the filter with a new one.
CAUTION: Replace the filter only with a filter of the original

type. Fault to do so can impair equipment reliability and
performance.
4. Clean the filter using the method selected by your organization.

5. Identify the filter's air intake side, indicated by the two coding tabs.

Traffic Monitoring System XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
6. Insert the clean filter in the holding frame and reinstall the front panel.
7. Insert the clean filter in the holding frame and reinstall the front panel.
Traffic Monitoring System

The XDM-100 incorporates a traffic monitoring system that enables rapid
allocation of major problems in the traffic passing through its aggregate and
I/O modules.
Principles of Operation
The XDM-100 monitoring system enables to monitor traffic passing through
the aggregate modules installed in slots A1, A2, B1, and B2 of the MXC-100
cards, and the I/O modules installed in slots I1 to I8 of the modules cage.
NOTE: I/O CWDM modules installed in the modules cage

slots (in XDM-100H systems) are not supported by the
monitoring system.
The main components of the monitoring system interface are located on the
ECU-F front panel. These components, except for the monitoring point and
monitoring indicator, are common to all modules. In addition, the system has a
monitoring point and monitoring indicators on the front panel of the modules.
The PIM2_21 and PIM2_63 have only one monitoring indicator used for all its
channels. STM-1 modules do not have a monitoring point, and use the
monitoring point on the ECU-F card.
Figure 5-2: ECU-F monitoring system interface

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Traffic Monitoring System
Maintenance Manual
The system's common components on the ECU-F are as follows:

MODULE selector
CHANNEL selector
MODULE, 2-digit display
CHANNEL, 2-digit display
The ECU-F components that serve only STM-1 modules are:
STM-1 MON monitoring point
MON indicator
The monitoring system components on the monitored modules include:
MON monitoring point
MON indicators
Figure 5-3: Monitoring system interface of a typical module
The monitoring system enables to monitor traffic passing through a module. To

do so, test equipment is connected to the monitoring point of the corresponding
module, and the module and port are selected by the system's selectors. As a
result, the traffic is closed through the test equipment and the signal can be
viewed, in an Eye pattern, on the test equipment display.
Selecting a module
The MODULE selector chooses the monitored module slot number. The
selected module is displayed on the 2-digit display to the right of the selector.
Pressing the selector upward increments the slot number; pressing it downward
decrements the slot number. The selection is cyclic. Possible selections are A1,
A2, B1, and B2 for the aggregate modules, and I1 to I8 for the I/O modules. If
the selected module is an STM-1, the MON indicator on the ECU-F lights.

Maintenance Manual
Selecting a channel
The CHANNEL selector chooses the specific monitored channel (port) on the
module selected. The selected channel is displayed on the 2-digit display to the
left of the selector. Pressing the selector upward increments the channel
number; pressing it downward decrements the channel number. The selection is
cyclic. Possible selections are from 00 to the module's maximum number of
channels. For example, in a PIM2_21 module (which has 21 ports) the
selection goes from 00 to 21. When the value 00 is selected, the system blocks
the monitoring to the selected module.
In addition to the number of the selected channel shown on the display, a MON
indicator lights near the selected port on the module.
If an STM-1 module is selected, the MON indicator on the ECU-F lights in
addition to the LED near the selected port on the module.
Stabilization time
The monitoring system has a stabilization time of approximately 1.5 seconds.
This means that after a new value is selected with the MODULE or CHANNEL
selectors, the display starts blinking for the stabilization time, and only after
that the new selection is displayed.
Response to events
This section describes the response of the monitoring system to the following
events:
Power-up
Cold restart
MXC-100 switching to redundancy
Warm restart
ECU-F extraction/insertion
After power-up, the monitoring system displays A1 00. This is the default state,
and indicates slot A1 and channel 00. Channel 00 is defined in the system as
idle state, and indicates that no channel was selected and that monitoring is
disabled. To enable the monitoring results, a module and a channel must be
selected.
After cold restart to an MXC-100 card, only the traffic passing through its
aggregate modules and their monitoring is lost, while the traffic and monitoring
of all other modules is not affected. For example, after a cold reset to

Maintenance Manual
MXC-100 in slot MXC-A, the traffic and monitoring in its aggregate modules
(slots A1 and A2) is lost, but the traffic and monitoring in aggregate modules
B1 and B2 and all other I/O modules is not affected.
The response of the system to MXC-100 switching to redundancy is identical
to the response to cold restart.
Warm restart does not affect the traffic or monitoring of any modules in the
XDM-100.
After extracting/inserting the ECU-F, the monitoring display is reset to the
default state: A1 00, and the monitoring history stored in the ECU-F's memory
is lost.
Assigning modules to slots

To monitor a module installed in a specific slot, the management system must
have previously assigned that module to the slot. If the module was not
assigned, the CHANNEL display will indicate 00 and remain in this state, even
if you attempt to change the selection.
If a module in a slot is replaced with a module of the same type, the display
will not change and the system will read the monitoring result for the channel
that was last selected. If a module has to be replaced with a module of a
different type, the new module must be assigned to the slot. Then, a new
MODULE and CHANNEL selection must be made.
Monitoring options
The system can monitor a number of channels in different modules
simultaneously. This feature is useful when traffic passing through different
modules in the XDM-100 has to be analyzed.
After monitoring channels of different modules, all selected channel numbers
of these modules are saved in the ECU-F's memory.
You can connect test equipment to various modules or connect test equipment
with multiple inputs to simultaneously monitor the traffic passing through the
channels in these modules.

Maintenance Manual
Monitoring Signal Levels

The following table lists the normal signal levels at the monitoring points for
the various modules.
Table 5-2: Aggregate and I/O modules monitoring data
Module type Monitoring point Number of Signal rate and level

channels
(ports)
SAM1_4/O ECU-F front panel 4 155 Mbps, CMI
SAM1_4/E ECU-F front panel 4 155 Mbps, CMI
SAM1_4/OE ECU-F front panel 4 155 Mbps, CMI
SIM1_4/O ECU-F front panel 4 155 Mbps, CMI
SIM1_4/E ECU-F front panel 4 155 Mbps, CMI
SIM1_4/OE ECU-F front panel 4 155 Mbps, CMI
SAM4_2 Module's front panel 2 622 Mbps, NRZ

SIM4_2 Module's front panel 2 622 Mbps, NRZ
SAM16_1 Module's front panel 1 2.5 Gbps, NRZ
PIM2_21 Module's front panel 21 2.048 Mbps, HDB-3
PIM2_63 Module's front panel 63 2.048 Mbps, HDB-3
PIM345_3 Module's front panel 3 34 or 45 Mbps, HDB-3

Maintenance Manual
Monitoring Modules Traffic

Monitoring the traffic of STM-1 and other modules operating at a different rate
is similar, and differs only in the location of the monitoring point and LED
indicators.
To monitor the traffic in a non-STM-1 module:

1. Identify the slot number of the module to be monitored.
2. Connect the test equipment to the monitoring point.
3. Select the slot number of the monitored module using the MODULE
selector.
4. Select the channel number of the monitored port using the CHANNEL
selector.
5. Wait for the display to stabilize (stop blinking), and then verify that the
required slot and channel were selected.
6. Verify that the MON indicator of the selected channel lights.
7. Read the test result on the test equipment connected to the monitoring
point.
To monitor the traffic in an STM-1 module:

1. Identify the slot number of the module to be monitored.
2. Connect the test equipment to the monitoring point on the ECU-F card.
3. Perform Steps 3 to 5 in the previous section.
4. Verify that the MON indicator on the ECU-F card and the corresponding
MON indicator on the STM-1 module light.
5. Read the test result on the test equipment connected to the monitoring
point.

Onsite Troubleshooting XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Onsite Troubleshooting
The purpose of onsite troubleshooting is to identify the hardware causing the
malfunction and return the equipment to normal operation as soon as possible.
Troubleshooting is usually initiated in response to one of the following
conditions:
Alarm or performance degradation reported by the management station.
Alarm or malfunction detected onsite by maintenance personnel, either as a
result of a troubleshooting activity initiated by the management center
personnel or as a result of a periodic inspection or preventive maintenance
action. Many problems can be detected via the various indicators available
on the XDM-100 system components.
This chapter assumes familiarity with the XDM-100, with SDH, data, and
CWDM equipment, and with the LightSoft and EMS-XDM management
stations. Refer to the respective user's manuals for details on the various
capabilities of the management stations, and for instructions on performing the
desired activities.
The following sections provide procedures for performing onsite
troubleshooting for various trouble categories, as well as for specific
subsystems, for example, OADMs, mux/demux subsystems, and so on. For
each category, you will find a troubleshooting table that provides the
instructions for identifying the trouble.
To use the troubleshooting table:

1. Identify the closest description of the trouble symptoms under
Symptoms.
2. Perform the required corrective actions listed under Corrective actions in
the table in the order they appear until the trouble is corrected.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Onsite Troubleshooting
Maintenance Manual
Troubleshooting Power Problems

Table 5-3: Troubleshooting power problems
No. Symptoms Probable cause Corrective actions

1 xRAP or Both main and 1. Check the site power distribution system.
xRAP-100 backup power 2. Check the DC voltage at the main and
POWER ON sources failed backup power terminals of the xRAP or
indicator is xRAP-100.
off
3. If the voltage is not within the correct range,
check cable connections up to the DC power
distribution panel, and make sure no fuses
are blown.
4. Check the voltage supplied by the main and
backup power sources.
5. Check the power connections to the xRAP or
xRAP-100.
6. Check the circuit breakers in the xRAP or
xRAP-100 and replace if necessary.
Equipment problem 1. Check the voltage at the MXC-100 end of
each power cable. Replace the cable or repair
the xRAP or xRAP-100 if there is no voltage
present.
2. If after checking (as explained above) and
reconnecting a cable to the equipment the
circuit breaker trips again, replace the
corresponding MXC-100 card.
3. If the problem occurs again after Step 2,
remove all the cards and modules from the
shelf and reinsert them one by one until you
find the component causing the circuit
breaker to trip. Replace that component.
2 MXC-100 No input power to 1. Check the corresponding circuit breaker in
ACTIVE the corresponding the xRAP or xRAP-100; reset any tripped
indicator is unit breaker.
off 2. Check the circuit breakers in the xRAP or
xRAP-100 and replace if necessary.
3. If the circuit breaker trips again, disconnect
the cable protected by the corresponding
circuit breaker from the equipment and
check the voltage polarity.
4. Check the power cable condition and make
sure that the cable is not damaged and does
not cause short circuits.
5. Check proper cable connection at both ends.
3 MXC-100 Technical failure in 1. Replace the unit.
FAIL the corresponding
indicator unit
lights

Maintenance Manual
Troubleshooting Using Component Indicators

The management station will usually provide onsite personnel with a list of
suspected components.
Start the troubleshooting of a suspected component by checking its indicators.
These indicators, located on the various cards and modules, can help you to
rapidly and efficiently identify a malfunctioning component in accordance with
the procedures outlined in the following tables.
NOTE: See description of indicator functions in Equipment

Description (on page A-1)
CAUTION: The following corrective actions are traffic

affecting.
Table 5-4: General troubleshooting procedures for cards/modules

1 Green ACT/AC Defective indicator 1. Press the LED TEST pushbutton on the
indicator is off ECU-F, and check that the indicator
lights. If not, replace the card/module.
Defective 1. Pull the card/module out and wait a
card/module minute before reinserting it. Make sure
that you fully insert the card or module
in its slot.
2. If the ACT/AC indicator does not turn
on after reinsertion, replace the
card/module.
2 Red FAIL/FL Defective 1. Remove the card/module and then
indicator does card/module reinsert the card/module after a few
not turn off minutes. Make sure the ACT/AC
after software indicator turns on after the card/module
download (this is reinserted.
occurs after 2. The FAIL/FL indicator must flash while
power-up and software is downloaded to the
resetting) card/module. Wait until the software
download is complete and check that
the FAIL/FL indicator turns off.
3. If the FAIL/FL indicator turns on again,
replace the card/module.
3 Orange (traffic Card/module not 1. Check with the management station
carrying) configured to carry operator if the card/module has already
indicator is off traffic been configured and provisioned; if not,
(when indicator ignore the state of the orange indicator.
is supported)

Maintenance Manual
Table 5-5: General troubleshooting procedures for optical transceiver plug-ins

1 Green The corresponding 1. When available, press the laser-on
transceiver optical transmitter pushbutton of the ECU-F to activate the
state indicator may have been corresponding laser.
is off turned off by the 2. If the problem persists, the laser
ALS function (see automatically turns off again after a few
NOTE below) seconds. Check that all the fibers are
properly connected to the corresponding
optical transceiver.
3. Replace the transceiver if the problem is
not corrected after the transceiver is
reinserted.
2 Transceiver Test equipment is For plug-in transceivers with monitoring
state indicator connected to the connector: the test equipment is connected to
lights in red monitoring connector the monitoring connector. This indication is
of the corresponding provided for identification purposes, and
plug-in does not necessarily indicate a malfunction.
Defective transceiver 1. Disconnect the fibers connected to the
transceiver, and remove the transceiver.
2. Reinstall it in its position, making sure
to fully engage its connector to the
mating card connector.
3. Replace the transceiver if the problem is
not corrected after the transceiver is
reinserted.
NOTE: An optical port with ALS capability turns off its

transmitter when the corresponding receive signal is lost.
Turning the transmitter off may cause a chain reaction, which
turns the optical signals off in a whole section of the network
and generates a large number of alarms.
As a result, it may be difficult to identify the real cause of the

problem, and you may need to use the management station
log records to identify the port.
Table 5-6: Troubleshooting procedures for electrical interface modules

1 Green AC Defective indicator 1. Press the LED TEST pushbutton on the
indicator is off ECU-F, and check that the indicator
lights. If not, replace the card/module.
Defective module 1. Pull the module out and wait a minute
before reinserting it. Make sure that you
fully insert the module in its slot.
2. If the AC indicator does not turn on
after reinsertion, replace the module.

Maintenance Manual

2 Red FL Defective module 1. Reset the module by removing and then
indicator does reinserting it after a few minutes. Make
not turn off sure the AC indicator turns on after the
after software module is reinserted.
download (this 2. The FL indicator must flash while
occurs after software is downloaded to the module.
power-up and Wait until the software download ends
resetting) and check that the FL indicator turns
off.
3. If the FL indicator turns on again,
replace the module.
Table 5-7: Troubleshooting procedures for optical OADM and mux/demux
1 Green AC Defective module 1. Pull the module out and wait a minute
indicator is off before reinserting it. Make sure that you
fully insert the module in its slot.

indicator does reinserting it after a few minutes. Make
not turn off sure the AC indicator turns on after the
after software module is reinserted.
download (this 2. The FL indicator must flash while
occurs after software is downloaded to the
power-up and component. Wait until the software
resetting) download ends and check that the FL
indicator turns off.
replace the module.
Table 5-8: Troubleshooting procedures for EISM modules

1 Green AC Defective module 1. Pull the module out and wait a minute
indicator is off before reinserting it. Make sure that you
fully insert the card in its slot.

Maintenance Manual

indicator on the reinserting it after a few minutes. Make
module does sure the AC indicator turns on after the
not turn off module is reinserted.
after software 2. The FL indicator must flash while
download (this software is downloaded to the module.
occurs after Wait until the software download ends
power-up and and check that the FL indicator turns
resetting) off.
replace the module.
3 Orange (traffic Module not Check with the management station operator
carrying) configured to carry whether the module has already been
indicator on traffic configured and provisioned; if not, ignore
module is off the state of the orange indicator.
4 Green (link Problem related to 1. Check port configuration.
state) indicator port 2. Check connections to LAN.
of an Ethernet
optical port is 3. Make sure at least one LAN station is
off active.
4. Replace optical transceiver of port.
5 Link state Problem related to 1. Check port configuration.
indicator of an port 2. Check connections to LAN.
10/100BaseT
Ethernet port is 3. Make sure at least one LAN station is
off active.
Timing Subsystem Troubleshooting

Table 5-9: Troubleshooting procedures for timing subsystem

1 Switching to Technical failure Force switching of traffic to the other
standby TMU MXC-100, and then replace the
MXC-100 card with the defective
TMU.
Missing T3/BITS 1. Check the equipment providing the
IN external external reference signal and make
reference signal sure it operates normally.
2. Check the cable connected to the
corresponding ECU connector.
Make sure both its ends are
properly connected to the mating
connector.
3. Check the cable wiring. Replace
the cable if in doubt.
4. Replace the corresponding ECU.

Maintenance Manual

Missing T4/BITS 1. Check the cable connected to the
OUT external corresponding ECU connector.
reference signal Make sure both its ends are
properly connected to the mating
connector.
2. Check the cable wiring. Replace
the cable if in doubt.
3. Replace the corresponding ECU.
4. Force switching of traffic to the
other MXC-100 card, and then
replace the MXC-100 card with
the defective TMU.
Loss of reference Troubleshoot the corresponding
clock source module and replace it if found faulty.
provided by a
tributary
Troubleshooting Transmission and Traffic

Alarms
Before any other troubleshooting activity, check the management station log to
find if a specific component has been reported as faulty and replace it.
Table 5-10: Troubleshooting transmission and traffic alarms
1 Alarm related External problem 1. Check the proper operation of the

to a tributary equipment providing the tributary
signal signal and its connections to the
XDM I/O port.
2. Use the results of the
commissioning tests as a reference
for the required signal levels, and
make measurements of current
levels at all the relevant
monitoring points.
Compare the reference levels with
the measured values; a significant
discrepancy may point to the failed
component (for example, low
transmit level, excessive fiber
attenuation due to physical
damage, and so on).

Maintenance Manual
The I/O module 1. Force switching to the protection

handling the path and reset the I/O module. Use
tributary signal is the results of the BIT test to
defective identify the faulty component.
2. Replace the I/O module if
suspected.
2 Alarm related External problem 1. Check the proper operation of the
to an equipment providing the aggregate
aggregate signal and its connections to the
signal XDM-100 port.
2. Use the network and site
documentation to identify the path
associated with the reported alarm
and all related optical and/or
electrical components.
Use the results of the
commissioning tests as a reference
for the required signal levels, and
make measurements of current
levels at all the relevant
monitoring points.
3. Compare the reference levels with
the measured values; a significant
attenuation due to physical
damage, and so on).
4. Force switching to the protection
path, and reset each component.
Use the results of the BIT test to
identify the faulty component.

Maintenance Manual
Troubleshooting Management Communication

When the management station cannot manage an XDM-100 shelf, use the table
below to identify the cause of the problem.
Before You Start:

Whenever problems are detected during commissioning tests and also when
troubleshooting a new installation, the possibility of configuration and/or
provisioning errors must not be overlooked. Under such circumstances, always
start the troubleshooting procedures by making a complete review of all
equipment configuration and provisioning parameters against the original
network design and correct as necessary.
Table 5-11: Troubleshooting management communication
No. Symptoms Probable Corrective actions

cause
1 Problems in Defective 1. Check for fault indications on the
management card/module in cards processing the management
traffic path management communication (see troubleshooting
traffic path in General troubleshooting
procedures for cards/modules (on
page 5-14)).
2. Force switching to the protection
path, and reset each component. Use
the results of the BIT test to identify
the faulty component.
Problem in 1. Use the network and site
transmission documentation to identify the path of
path the management communication to
the corresponding XDM-100 shelf,
and all the related optical and/or
electrical components.
2. Use the results of the commissioning
tests as a reference for the required
signal levels, and make
measurements of current levels at all
the relevant monitoring points.
3. Compare the reference levels with the
measured values; a significant
attenuation due to physical damage,
and so on).

Maintenance Manual
No. Symptoms Probable Corrective actions

cause
Other problems Replace suspected components in the
following sequence:
1. Hubs and Ethernet cables used for
management traffic
2. ECU/ECU-F card
3. MXC-100 card

Replacing Cards and Modules XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Replacing Cards and Modules
Safety and Workmanship

Refer to Before You Start (on page 2-1) for safety and workmanship
instructions.
CAUTION: Static Sensitive Devices
PROPER HANDLING AND GROUNDING

PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED
XDM-100 equipment contains components sensitive to

electrostatic discharge (ESD). To prevent ESD damage,
strictly observe all the precautions listed in Protection against
ESD (on page 2-28). Keep parts and cards in their antistatic
packaging material until you are ready to install them.
The use of an antistatic wrist strap connected to a grounded

equipment frame or rack is recommended when handling
cards and modules during installation, removal, or connection
to internal connectors.
Before You Start:

When inserting cards and modules, make sure to carefully align the card or
module with the shelf guide rails. If you feel resistance during insertion,
immediately retract the card/module and then repeat the process.
Hold the card/module straight during insertion and removal, and pull or push it
slowly and carefully to avoid touching components located on adjacent
cards/modules.
Do not use excessive torque when tightening the fastening screws of cards and
modules.
Visually inspect the card and the mating backplane connectors and make sure
that there are no signs of physical damage. In particular, check for bent
connector pins.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Replacing Cards and Modules
Maintenance Manual
Before replacing any card, module, NVM, or optical

transceiver:
1. Check that the replacement component has not been physically damaged
during shipment.
2. Remove the replacement component from its antistatic protection
packaging, and perform a visual inspection to detect damage during
shipment. Report any problems.
3. Record the hardware and software versions as indicated on the component
identification labels, and make sure they are compatible with those of the
component to be replaced.
After replacing a component:

1. Place it in its antistatic protection packaging and close it.
2. Attach a report to the packaging explaining the reason for the replacement,
and identify the network site, physical location, shelf, and time of
replacement.

Maintenance Manual
Replacing MXC-100 Cards
CAUTION:
If your system contains SAMs, always remove them from
the MXC-100 prior to removing the MXC-100 card from
the shelf.
If the shelf has a single MXC-100 card, organize your
work to replace it as rapidly as possible. While the
MXC-100 card is out, management communication with
this shelf is not possible.
blink simultaneously, this indicates that the MXC is not
mounted correctly, or that not all four screws are properly
locked.
Before attempting to remove the card, monitor its NVM
(yellow) indicator; remove the card only after this
indicator has been off for at least 2 minutes.
To replace the MXC-100:

1. Disconnect the aggregate module's fibers/cables, and remove the module
from the MXC-100 to be replaced, according to the procedure described in
Replacing I/O and Aggregate Modules (on page 5-28).
2. If the shelf has two MXC-100 cards (this means that it supports MXC-100
redundancy), first initiate a forced switching to the other MXC-100 card.
3. Wait until the NVM (yellow) indicator of the MXC-100 to be replaced
turns off and remains off for at least 2 minutes, and then remove the NVM
card as described in Replacing the NVM on MXC-100 cards (on
page 5-26). It is recommended to wait until the yellow indicator of the
other MXC-100 card also turns off.
CAUTION: When replacing any MXC-100 card, the upper

left screw operates a microswitch. When this screw is open, it
indicates to the XDM-100 platform that the MXC-100 card is
not installed. This screw must be opened first when replacing
an MXC-100 card.

Maintenance Manual
WARNING: When replacing an MXC-100 in a redundant

XDM-100 shelf, do not open both MXC-100 fastening screws
simultaneously.
4. Open the MXC-100 upper left screw first, then the upper right screw, and
then the two lower screws.
5. Hold both extractor handles, and pull them simultaneously outward until
the card is released from the backplane.
6. Keep holding the handles, and gently pull the card out of the shelf.
7. If the NVM card has to be transferred from the replaced MXC-100 card to
its replacement, do this now (see Replacing the NVM on MXC-100 cards
(on page 5-26)).
8. Insert the rear end of the replacement card into the corresponding card
guides.
9. Push the cards front panel with both hands until the extractor handles
attach to the panel.
10. Push the card in by holding both handles with your hands, and pushing
them simultaneously inward, until the card mates the chassis connectors
and is locked in place. If you feel resistance before the connectors are
mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.
11. Close the cards captive screws as follows: first close the upper left screw,
then the upper right screw, and then the two lower screws.
NOTE: Make sure that all four screws in the MXC-100 are
properly tightened. Failing to do so may result in improper
operation of the shelf.

mounted correctly or that not all four screws are properly
locked.
12. Install the required aggregate modules according to the site installation
plan, as described in Installing Aggregate Modules in MXC-100 Cards (on
page 3-54).

Maintenance Manual
Replacing the NVM on MXC-100 cards
CAUTION: To prevent disruption of data stored on the

NVM, make sure you do not open the NVM cover while the
MXC-100 accesses the NVM. Before attempting to remove
the NVM, monitor the NVM (yellow) indicator; open the
NVM cover only after the NVM indicator on the MXC-100
has been off for at least 2 minutes.
To replace the NVM:

1. If the shelf has two MXC-100 cards (this means that it supports MXC-100
redundancy), first force switching to the other MXC-100 card.
2. Wait until the NVM (yellow) indicator of the MXC-100 on which the
NVM card to be replaced is located turns off, and remains off for at least 2
minutes.
3. Open the two captive screws fastening the NVM cover to the MXC-100.
4. Press the NVM release pushbutton, using the NVM cover's edge as an
extractor tool.
5. Carefully extract the NVM from the MXC-100.
6. Orient the replacement NVM card in the correct position and push it
straight into its socket.
7. Replace the NVM's cover, and fasten it to the MXC-100 with its two
captive screws.
This completes the NVM card replacement. At this stage, you may either wait
for the automatic updating of the database stored on the new NVM card (this
may take up to one hour), or immediately force a switching to the MXC-100 on
which the NVM card has been replaced.

Maintenance Manual
Replacing ECU Cards

This section provides replacement instructions for the two ECU versions:
ECU-F and ECU.
CAUTION: Organize your work to replace the ECU card as

rapidly as possible. While the ECU card is out, management,
debugging, T3/T4 synchronization, and other tasks supported
by this card are not possible.
Before attempting to remove the card, monitor the NVM

(yellow) and TMU (orange) indicators of the MXC-100
card(s) installed in the shelf; remove the ECU only after the
MXC-100 indicators have been off for at least 2 minutes.
To replace the ECU:

1. Mark each cable connected to the card for identification purposes.
2. Disconnect the cables connected to the ECU.
3. Open the two captive screws fastening the card to the shelf.
4. Remove the card to be replaced by pulling its handle.
5. Insert the rear end of the replacement card in the corresponding card
guides.
6. Push the card in until it mates the chassis connectors. If you feel resistance
before the connectors are mated, pull the card out and repeat the procedure.
7. Fasten the card to the shelf by its two captive screws.
8. Reconnect the cables and fibers disconnected in Step 2 to the replacement
card.

Maintenance Manual
Replacing I/O and Aggregate Modules

The following procedure is applicable to all I/O and aggregate modules.
Before You Start:

For modules with electrical interfaces, which use electrical interface protection
via TPMs, first force a switch to the protection module (IOP) before replacing
the module.
To replace I/O or aggregate modules:

1. Mark each cable and each fiber connected to the module for identification
purposes.
2. Disconnect any cables or fibers connected to the module to be replaced.
3. Open the captive screws fastening the module to the shelf.
4. Remove the module to be replaced by pulling its handle.
5. Insert the rear end of the replacement module into the corresponding
module guides.
6. Push the module in until it mates the chassis connectors. If you feel
resistance before the connectors are mated, pull the module out and repeat
the procedure.
7. Fasten the module to the shelf by its captive screws.
8. Reconnect any cables or fibers disconnected in Step 2 to the replacement
module.

Maintenance Manual
Replacing SFP Transceivers in Optical

Interfaces
ECI Telecom's Optical Networks Division supplies field-replaceable SFP
transceivers. Hot swapping is allowed, provided you observe all the safety
precautions described in Before You Start (on page 2-1) during the
replacement.
To replace an SFP transceiver:

1. Mark each fiber connected to the transceiver for identification purposes.
2. Identify the position of the SFP transceiver to be replaced on the module.
3. Disconnect the fibers connected to the transceiver.
4. Remove the transceiver plug-in installed in the corresponding position by
pulling its tab.
5. Insert the rear end of the replacement transceiver plug-in into the prescribed
position, and push slowly backward to mate its rear connector with the
corresponding optical interface module connector until the transceiver
clicks into place (see figure below). If you feel resistance before the
transceiver plug-in is fully inserted, retract the transceiver and repeat the
insertion.
Figure 5-4: Inserting an SFP transceiver into an I/O module
6. Reconnect the fibers disconnected in Step 3.

Maintenance Manual
Replacing the FCU

The FCU can be replaced without disconnecting the power from the XDM-100
shelf.
CAUTION: To prevent shelf overheating, the replacement

must be completed within 2 to 3 minutes.
To replace the FCU:

1. Prepare the replacement FCU so you can install it immediately after
removing the old FCU. In particular, carefully inspect the interior of the
FCU to ensure that no foreign matter, for example, packaging chips, is
present inside the unit.
2. Open the two captive screws fastening the FCU to the shelf.
3. Remove the FCU to be replaced from the shelf by slowly pulling it out. Be
careful, as the internal fans may still be rotating.
4. Insert the replacement FCU in the corresponding shelf guides, and push it
carefully in until the FCU fully engages the mating internal connector of
the XDM-100 shelf. Make sure that the FCU front panel is flush with the
shelf frame front edges. As the FCU is plugged into its mating connector,
the green ACTIVE indicator on its panel should turn on.
5. Fasten the FCU to the shelf by its two captive screws.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Replacing xRAP/xRAP-100
Maintenance Manual Components
Replacing xRAP/xRAP-100 Components

This section provides instructions for replacing xRAP/ xRAP-100 components
identified as faulty as a result of the troubleshooting procedures described in
this chapter.
Replacing xRAP Circuit Breakers

xRAP circuit breakers can be replaced without disconnecting the power (hot
swapping).
To replace the xRAP circuit breakers:

1. Open the two captive screws fastening the xRAP front cover to the xRAP
chassis and remove the cover (see figure below).
Figure 5-5: Replacing the xRAP circuit breakers

Replacing xRAP/xRAP-100 XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Components Maintenance Manual
2. Identify the faulty circuit breaker and remove it by pulling it straight out of
its socket.
3. Check the replacement circuit breaker ratings against those of the replaced
circuit breaker.
WARNING: For continued protection against risk of fire,

replace only with the same type and rating of fuse.
4. Insert the replacement circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets of the
corresponding xRAP power terminal board, as shown in the above figure.
5. Reinstall the xRAP front cover and fasten it with its two captive screws.
Replacing xRAP-100 Circuit Breakers

xRAP-100 circuit breakers can be replaced without disconnecting the power
(hot swapping).
To replace the xRAP-100 circuit breakers:

1. If the xRAP-100 front panel has not been removed, open the two captive
screws fastening the xRAP-100 front cover to its chassis and remove the
cover (see figure below).
2. Identify the faulty circuit breaker and remove it by pulling it straight out of
its socket.
3. Check the replacement circuit breaker ratings against those of the replaced
circuit breaker.
WARNING: For continued protection against risk of fire,

replace only with the same type and rating of fuse.
4. Insert the replacement circuit breaker into the circuit breaker sockets of the
corresponding xRAP-100 power terminal board, as shown in the figure
below.
5. Reinstall the xRAP-100 cover and fasten it with its two captive screws.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Replacing xRAP/xRAP-100
Maintenance Manual Components

A
A Equipment Description
In This Appendix
Shelf Overview ...........................................................................A-2
Fan Control Unit (FCU) .............................................................A-2
External Connection Unit (ECU)................................................A-5
Main Cross-Connect and Control (MXC) Card Options ............A-9
SDH Aggregate Modules (SAM) .............................................A-14
I/O Modules..............................................................................A-20
EISM I/O Modules ...................................................................A-29
Tributary Protection Unit (TPU) ..............................................A-33
Accessories for Rack Installation .............................................A-39
Cables .......................................................................................A-51
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary A-1

Shelf Overview XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Shelf Overview
The basic XDM-100 shelf is 450 mm wide, 231 mm deep, and 200 mm high.
When the optional TPU (Tributary Protection Unit) is added to the shelf, the
combined height of the basic shelf and the TPU is 275 mm.
On the right side of the shelf is a vertical slot, which houses the FCU (Fan
Control Unit). The lower part of the shelf consists of the cards cage with three
horizontal slots, which accommodate (from bottom to top):
The External Connection Unit (ECU) or ECU-F.
One or two MXC-100 (Main Cross-Connect and Control) cards, each
including two slots for SDH aggregate modules (SAMs). When only one
MXC-100 card is used in slot MXC-A, an MXC-BR bridging card is
inserted in slot MXC-B.
The upper part of the shelf consists of the modules cage, where eight horizontal
slots can house up to eight I/O (PDH, SDH, or data) modules.
In an expanded XDM-100 shelf with I/O protection, a TPU shelf is mounted on
top of the basic XDM-100 shelf, including a TC (Tributary Control) module
and TPMs (Tributary Protection Modules).
Figure A-1: Basic shelf
Fan Control Unit (FCU)

The FCU is positioned at the right side of the shelf and provides cooling air to
the system from nine separate fans. Air is drawn in by the fans from the right
side of the chassis, and exhausted through the horizontally mounted cards and
modules and through the left side of the chassis.
A controller in the active MXC-100 card controls the fans. In case of failure of
one of the fans, the remaining fans start to operate in turbo mode and the fail
A-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Fan Control Unit (FCU)
Maintenance Manual
LED lights up until the FCU is replaced. The FCU can be extracted and
replaced without interrupting the multiplexer operation (hot swapping) if the
activity does not exceed a few minutes.
WARNING: Do not leave the system without an FCU unit

for more than a couple of minutes. If the FCU unit fails and
you do not have a replacement unit, you must shut down the
entire XDM-100 system.
Figure A-2: FCU, general view
Table A-1: FCU front panel LED indicators
Marking Color Function

ACTIVE Green Lights steadily when the card is powered and operating
normally.
FAIL Red Normally off.
Lights steadily when a fault is detected.

Fan Control Unit (FCU) XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Air Filters for FCU

XDM-100 shelves operating in extremely dusty and/or humid environments
may require installation of air filters.
Air filters are available as an ordering option for theXDM-100 shelf. They can
also be separately ordered, for installation on shelves at customers premises.
The purpose of a air filter is to reduce the accumulation of dust and dirt, carried
by the cooling air flowing through the shelf, on the internal components of the
shelf. The combination of dust and humidity produces a capacitive/conductive
layer between components installed on cards and modules: this may degrade
equipment performance or even cause malfunctions. Moreover, the insulating
effect of a dust layer causes components to operate at higher temperatures, thus
ultimately decreasing equipment reliability.
A air filter reduces dirt accumulation, and thus prevents degradation of
equipment reliability and performance. However, on the other side, filters
increase the resistance to airflow, and therefore the appropriate type should be
selected in accordance with the actual operating conditions.
ECI Telecom offers an air filters to handle these problems. The filter is housed
in a special frame installed on the right side of the XDM that is also used as an
installation bracket.
NOTE: Air filters are not supported for 19" rack installations.
Two types of air filters are available:

Low density foam filter, having a density of 10 pores per inch (PPI)
High density foam filter (45 PPI) in compliance with NEBS standards
Figure A-3: Installed air filter

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and External Connection Unit (ECU)
Maintenance Manual
The appropriate filter should be selected in accordance with the specific

environmental conditions. In extremely dusty sites or when NEBS compliance
is required, the 45 PPI filter can be used. For all other sites, the 10 PPI filter is
preferred.
NOTE: It is not recommended to use air filters in

environments that enable normal operation without direct air
filtering.
Filter maintenance intervals must be strictly observed. These are application

specific and depend on the environmental conditions. The XDM-100 is
equipped with a pair of sensors that detect when the filter is fully loaded and
reports an alarm to the XDM-100 management. The alarm should be handled
by cleaning or replacing the filter. It is accepted for electronic equipment
design to recommend cleaning or replacing air filters every three months.
External Connection Unit (ECU)

The ECU is located in the lowest slot of the XDM-100 shelf. It is available in
two different configurations, ECU-F and ECU, and interfaces between the
XDM-100 platform and the external world.
ECU-F
The ECU-F supports:
Management interfaces:
Management (NMS and EMS) interface (Ethernet)
Ethernet hub for the connection of multiple Network Elements (NEs)
Serial (RS-232) interface for craft terminal
USB interface
Synchronization inputs and outputs (T3/T4)
Alarm interfaces and indications, including:
Alarm severity outputs (Critical, Major, Minor, Warning)
External alarm outputs and inputs to client or xRAP/xRAP-100
Alarm Cut Off (ACO)
LEDs for display of operation and alarms

External Connection Unit (ECU) XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Traffic monitoring, including:

Selection and display of the traffic interface channel currently being
monitored for all I/O (I1 to I8) and all aggregate (A1, A2, B1, B2) slots
Monitor interface for STM-1 ports
Activations, including:
Laser activation during Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) for
maintenance purposes
LEDs test for the entire shelf
Hold-up capacitors
The front panel of the ECU-F card includes the various interface connectors
and a display for maintenance purposes.
Figure A-4: ECU-F front panel
Table A-2: ECU-F indicators and functions
Name Item Function
USB Serial port For future use.

ALARMS 36-pin SCSI Used to connect alarm input and output lines via the
connector xRAP/xRAP-100 or directly to the client.
DEBUG 9-pin D-type male Serial RS-232 communication channel for use by
connector technical support personnel.
F-CHANNEL 9-pin D-type male Serial RS-232 communication channel supporting
connector SLIP for connecting to an eCraft terminal.
T3_1/T4_1 9-pin D-type male Main timing input and output using an ITU-T Rec.
connector G.703 interface: T3 and T4 for 2.048 MHz signals.
T3_2/T4_2 9-pin D-type male Protection timing input and output using an ITU-T
connector Rec. G.703 interface: T3 and T4 for 2.048 MHz
signals.
MNG MAIN RJ-45 connector Main Ethernet 10BaseT management interface.
MNG PROT RJ-45 connector Protection Ethernet 10BaseT management interface.
MODULE Selector Selects the module to be monitored (presented in the
2-digit display). Press upward to increment and
downward to decrement.
CHANNEL Selector Selects the channel to be monitored (presented in the
2-digit display). Press upward to increment and
downward to decrement.
STM-1 MON DIN 1.0/2.3 STM-1 monitoring port for all multiplexer STM-1
connector signals.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and External Connection Unit (ECU)
Maintenance Manual
Name Item Function
LASER Pushbutton Forced laser activation during Automatic Laser

ACTIVE Shutdown (ALS).
LED TEST Pushbutton Turns on all the indicators located on cards/modules
installed in the shelf, for test purposes.
ACO Pushbutton Alarm Cut-Off pushbutton, used to temporarily

disable the xRAP/xRAP-100 and ECU-F buzzer when
an alarm condition is present. The buzzer is activated
again when a new alarm condition is detected.
MON Yellow LED Indicates that monitoring has been activated.
ACT Green LED Indicates that the ECU-F card is active and powered.
FAIL Red LED Card Failure Indicator. When there is more than one
alarm in the shelf, the alarm indicator that represents
the highest severity lights.
CRT Red LED Critical Alarm Indicator. When there is more than one
MAJ Orange LED Major Alarm Indicator. When there is more than one
MIN Yellow LED Minor Alarm Indicator. When there is more than one
WAR Yellow LED Warning Alarm Indicator. When there is more than
one alarm in the shelf, the alarm indicator that
represents the highest severity lights.
Also lights when buzzer has been muted by ACO
pushbutton.
ECU
The ECU card is suitable for sites that do not require external timing
input/output or electrical monitor points. It supports:
Management interfaces, including:
Management (NMS and EMS) interface (Ethernet)
One Ethernet connection to Network Elements (NEs), named MNG
MAIN
Serial (RS-232) interface for craft terminal
USB interface

External Connection Unit (ECU) XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Synchronization inputs and outputs (T3/T4)

Alarm interfaces and indications, including:
Alarm severity outputs (Critical, Major, Minor, Warning)
Alarm Cut Off (ACO)
External alarm outputs and inputs only to xRAP/xRP-100
LEDs for the display of operation and alarms
Activations, including:
Laser activation during Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) for
maintenance purposes
LEDs test for the entire shelf
The front panel of the ECU includes the various interface connectors and a
display for maintenance purposes.
Figure A-5: ECU front panel
Table A-3: ECU indicators and functions
Name Item Function
USB Serial port For future use.

ALARMS 36-pin SCSI Used to connect alarm input and output lines via
connector the xRAP/ xRAP-100.
DEBUG 9-pin D-type male Serial RS-232 communication channel for use by
connector technical support personnel.
F-CHANNEL 9-pin D-type male Serial RS-232 communication channel supporting
connector SLIP for connecting to an eCraft terminal.
T3_1/T4_1 9-pin D-type male Main timing input and output using an ITU-T
connector Rec. G.703 interface: T3 and T4 for 2.048 MHz
signals.
T3_2/T4_2 9-pin D-type male Protection timing input and output using an ITU-
connector T Rec. G.703 interface: T3 and T4 for 2.048 MHz
signals.
MNG MAIN RJ-45 connector Main Ethernet 10BaseT management interface.
LASER Pushbutton Forced laser activation during Automatic Laser
ACTIVE Shutdown (ALS).
LED TEST Pushbutton Turns on all the indicators located on
cards/modules installed in the shelf, for test
purposes.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Main Cross-Connect and Control
Maintenance Manual (MXC) Card Options
Name Item Function
ACO Pushbutton Alarm Cut-Off pushbutton, used to temporarily

disable the xRAP/xRAP-100 or ECU buzzer
when an alarm condition is present. The buzzer is
activated again when a new alarm condition is
detected.
ACT Green LED Indicates that the ECU card is active and
powered.
FAIL Red LED Card Failure Indicator. When there is more than
CRT Red LED Critical Alarm Indicator. When there is more than
MAJ Orange LED Major Alarm Indicator. When there is more than
MIN Yellow LED Minor Alarm Indicator. When there is more than
WAR Yellow LED Warning Alarm Indicator. When there is more
than one alarm in the shelf, the alarm indicator
that represents the highest severity lights.
Also lights when buzzer has been muted by ACO
pushbutton.
Main Cross-Connect and Control (MXC)

Card Options
When installed in the expanded redundancy configuration, the XDM-100 shelf
accommodates two identical MXC-100 cards, one in slot MXC-A and the other
in slot MXC-B. This option is described in MXC-100 Redundant Option.
Figure A-6: Shelf with MXC-100 redundancy

Main Cross-Connect and Control XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
(MXC) Card Options Maintenance Manual
When installed without the redundant option, the XDM-100 shelf contains one
MXC-100 card installed in slot MXC-A, and a bridging unit, the MXC-BR,
installed in slot MXC-B. This option is described in MXC-100 Nonrredundant
Option (on page A-14).
Figure A-7: Shelf without MXC-100 redundancy
One or two aggregate modules can be installed in each MXC-100 card,

as described in SDH Aggregate Modules (SAM) (on page A-14).
The MXC-100 performs the following functions:
Control-related functions:
Communications and control (by CPU)
Routing and handling of 32 DCC channels
Support of the NonVolatile flash Memory (NVM) card
Alarms and maintenance
Dual DC power input and power supply for all modules
Input Filtering (INF) function for the entire shelf
Voltage and control for Fan Control Unit (VFCU)
SDH-related functions:
SDH cross-connect 4/3/1
SDH timing and synchronization
Support for SDH Aggregate Modules (SAMs), including control and
power supply

CAUTION:
If your system contains SAMs, always remove them from
the MXC-100 prior to removing the MXC-100 card from
the shelf.
mounted correctly, or that not all four screws are properly
locked.
Figure A-8: MXC-100 front panel
Table A-4: MXC-100 indicators and functions
Name Item Function

Microswitch (Concealed Blocks MXC control to all modules (I/O and aggregate)
beneath tab) when the MXC-100 screw is opened to extract the card.
POWER IN A D-type, 2-pin Main power input for the XDM-100 shelf.
connector
POWER IN B D-type, 2-pin Protection power input for the XDM-100 shelf.
connector
ACT Green LED Indicates that the MXC-100 is active and powered.
MAIN Blue LED Indicates that this MXC-100 card is the current
Multiplexer Control Processor.
If the FAIL, MAIN, and TMU LEDs blink simultaneously,
this indicates that the MXC-100 is not mounted correctly.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected.
Flashes during software download.
TMU Orange LED Indicates that the TiMing Unit (TMU) is active.
NVM Yellow LED Indicates that the NonVolatile Memory (NVM) is active.
A2 slot Slot for aggregate module. See specific module
descriptions for module indicator and connector
descriptions.
RESET button (Concealed System hardware reset. Resets the aggregate modules in
beneath NVM slots A1 and A2 without affecting the I/O modules in the
cover) XDM-100 shelf.
A1 slot Slot for aggregate module. See specific module
descriptions for module indicator and connector
descriptions.

Main Cross-Connect and Control XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
(MXC) Card Options Maintenance Manual
MXC-100 Redundant Option

When the XDM-100 system is installed in a redundant configuration, the
MXC-100 card installed in slot MXC-A serves as the main control card and the
card installed in slot MXC-B serves as the protection control card.
You can insert four aggregate modules of any supported type, two in each
MXC-100 card.
Figure A-9: Shelf with MXC redundancy
Both MXC-100 cards perform the following functions simultaneously in a 1+1

protection configuration:
Communications and control
Alarm and maintenance
Cross-connect
Timing and synchronization
Distribution of power supply to all modules (xINF function)
Routing and handling of 32 DCC channels
The active MXC-100 card is configured via EMS-XDM, ECI Telecoms
Optical Networks Divisions element management system.
The protection MXC-100 card in slot MXC-B provides full 1+1 protection to
the cross-connect matrix, and full 1:1 protection to all other functions, since it
has an identical database to the active MXC-100 card installed in slot MXC-A.
The matrices and power supplies on both MXC-100 units (MXC-A and
MXC-B) are active simultaneously.
By default, after powerup, the TiMing Unit (TMU) in the MXC-100 card in
slot MXC-A is the active timing unit. This is indicated by the TMU LED on the
front panel of the MXC-100.
When the MXC-100 card in slot MXC-A is unscrewed for replacing it, control
switches over from MXC-A to MXC-B.

NOTE: This process takes several minutes and may affect

traffic if the timing or SubNetwork Connection Protection
(SNCP) functions were previously handled by the MXC-100
card in slot MXC-A.
In case of a hardware failure in the active MXC-100 card or its traffic

interconnection, or when the active MXC-100 card in slot MXC-A is
unscrewed (for example, for replacing the card), the I/O interface modules
traffic switches to the protection MXC-100 card within a maximum of 50 ms,
and all control functions switch from the main MXC-100 to the protection
MXC-100 card.
NOTE:
In case of a control failure in the MXC-100 card, the
aggregate modules in that card cannot be controlled.
However, this does not affect traffic.
The switching of control functions takes several minutes
and may affect traffic if the timing or SNCP functions
were previously handled by the MXC-100 card in slot
MXC-A.
In the MXC redundant option, a separate power input is fed to each MXC-100,
providing the XDM-100 platform with protection in case of a malfunction in
the power input of the main MXC-100 card.
NOTE: If the Input Filter (INF) block of the main MXC-100

in slot MXC-A fails, the 48 V supply voltage is provided by
the INF block of the MXC-100 in slot MXC-B. Only if the
low voltage power supply in the MXC-100 in slot MXC-A
fails, then all its functions and aggregate modules fail, and
common equipment redundancy is provided by the MXC-100
in slot MXC-B.
The system can be defined so that in this case the traffic

carried by the aggregate modules lines is protected by the
SNCP or Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) mechanism,
and switches over to the aggregate modules lines of the other
MXC-100.

SDH Aggregate Modules (SAM) XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
MXC-100 Nonredundant Option

In the basic configuration of the XDM-100 system, only one MXC-100 card is
installed in slot MXC-A. In this case, an MXC-BR bridge card is installed in
slot MXC-B. The MXC-BR includes its aggregate connections internally.
You can insert two aggregate modules of any supported type in the MXC-100
card in slot MXC-A.
Figure A-10: Shelf without MXC redundancy
SDH Aggregate Modules (SAM)

Two SDH Aggregate Modules (SAMs) are associated with each MXC-100
card. The MXC-100 card provides power and control to its aggregate modules
and, when there are two MXC-100 cards in the shelf, the traffic and timing
buses of each module are connected to both MXC-100 cards.
NOTE: The SAMs must always be removed from the

MXC-100 card before removing the card from the shelf.
A variety of aggregate modules with electrical, optical, and mixed interfaces

are available, as follows:
Table A-5: Available aggregate module types
Type Designation
Electrical SAM SAM1_4/E (on page A-15)
Optical SAMs SAM1_4/O (on page A-16)
SAM4_2 (on page A-17)
SAM16_1 (on page A-18)

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and SDH Aggregate Modules (SAM)
Maintenance Manual
Type Designation
Mixed Aggregate SAM1_4/OE (on page A-19)
Module
All optical cards contain slots for the insertion of Small Form-factor Pluggable
(SFP) transceivers.
NOTE:
All modules have a handle to facilitate easy removal and
insertion. The handle has been removed from the
illustrations in this section in order not to obscure the
front panel markings.
The traffic of STM-1 modules (I/O or aggregate) can be
monitored via the STM-1 MON connector on the ECU-F
card.
Electrical SAM
SAM1_4/E
The SAM1_4/E is an electrical aggregate module with four electrical STM-1
(155 Mbps) interfaces (pairs of DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors).
A maximum of four SAM1_4/E modules, totaling 16 interfaces, can be
incorporated in an XDM-100 shelf with full MXC redundancy, and a maximum
of two SAM1_4/E modules, totaling eight interfaces, can be incorporated in an
XDM-100 shelf with no MXC redundancy.
Channel monitoring is performed via the STM-1 monitoring port on the
ECU-F.
Figure A-11: SAM1_4/E aggregate module

Maintenance Manual
Table A-6: SAM1_4/E front panel LED indicators
Marking Full name Color Function

AC Active Green Lights steadily when the module is
powered and operating normally.
FL Fail Red Normally off.
Flashes during software download from the
MXC, powerup, reset, or when new
software is available from the management
station.
TR Traffic Orange Lights when there is traffic
cross-connecting through the module.
MON Monitor Yellow Indicates that the channel is being
monitored (separate LED for each pair of
electrical connectors).
Optical SAMs
NOTE: All optical modules incorporate SFP transceivers

with LC connectors, which should be purchased only through
ECI Telecom.
SAM1_4/O
The SAM1_4/O is an optical aggregate module with four STM-1 (155 Mbps)
interfaces, with slots for SFP transceivers.
A maximum of four SAM1_4/O modules, totaling 16 interfaces, can be
of two SAM1_4/O modules, totaling eight interfaces, can be incorporated in an
ECU-F.
Figure A-12: SAM1_4/O aggregate module

Maintenance Manual
Table A-7: SAM1_4/O front panel LED indicators

AC Active Green Lights steadily when the module is powered
and operating normally.
MXC, after powerup, reset, or when new
station.
TR Traffic Orange Lights when there is traffic cross-connecting
through the module.
ON Laser Green Lights when traffic is being transmitted
Active (separate LED for each SFP transceiver).
MON Monitor Yellow Indicates that the channel is being monitored
(separate LED for each SFP transceiver).
SAM4_2
The SAM4_2 is an optical aggregate module with two STM-4 (622 Mbps)
interfaces, with two slots for SFP transceivers.
A maximum of four SAM4_2 modules, totaling eight interfaces, can be
of two SAM4_2 modules, totaling four interfaces, can be incorporated in an
Figure A-13: SAM4_2 aggregate module
The front panel has a 622 Mbps monitoring point with a DIN 1.0/2.3 connector,
and these LED indicators:

Maintenance Manual
Table A-8: SAM4_2 front panel LED indicators

station.
through the module.
SAM16_1
The SAM16_1 is an optical aggregate module with one STM-16 (2.488 Gbps)
interface and one slot for an SFP transceiver.
A maximum of four SAM16_1 modules, totaling four interfaces, can be
of two SAM16_1 modules, totaling two interfaces, can be incorporated in an
Figure A-14: SAM16_1 aggregate module
The front panel has a 2.5 Gbps monitoring point with an SMA connector, and
these LED indicators:

Maintenance Manual
Table A-9: SAM16_1 front panel LED indicators

AC Active Green Lights steadily when the module is powered and
operating normally.
station.
through the module.
ON Laser Green Lights when traffic is being transmitted on the
Active SFP transceiver.
MON Monitor Yellow Indicates that the channel on the SFP
transceiver is being monitored.
Mixed Aggregate Module
NOTE: All optical interfaces incorporate SFP transceivers.
SAM1_4/OE
The SAM1_4/OE is a mixed electrical/optical aggregate module with two
electrical STM-1 (155 Mbps) interfaces (DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors), and two
optical STM-1 interfaces with slots for SFP transceivers.
A maximum of four SAM1_4/OE modules, totaling 16 interfaces, can be
of two SAM1_4/OE modules, totaling eight interfaces, can be incorporated in
an XDM-100 shelf with no MXC redundancy.
ECU-F.
Figure A-15: SAM1_4/OE aggregate module

I/O Modules XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Table A-10: SAM1_4/OE front panel LED indicators

MXC, powerup, reset, or when new software is
available from the management station.
through the module.
ON Laser Green Lights when optical traffic is being transmitted
(separate LED for each SFP transceiver or pair
of electrical connectors).
I/O Modules
Eight slots are available in the XDM-100 I/O modules cage to accommodate
the various types of I/O modules, as follows:
PDH I/O Modules (PIMs) and SDH I/O Modules (SIMs) can be inserted
into any of the I1 through I8 positions without any limitations
Ethernet Interface and Switching Modules (EISMs) and PIM2_63 PDH I/O
Modules occupy two slots, and can be inserted in slots I1-I2, I3-I4, I5-I6, or
I7-I8
NOTE: Optical SIM modules and some EISM modules

incorporate SFP transceivers with LC connectors, which
should be purchased only through ECI Telecom.
PIMs and SIMs with electrical interfaces fully support direct connection to the
module without other external connection modules.
Table A-11: I/O module types
Type Designation
Electrical I/O Modules PIM2_21 (on page A-22)
PIM2_63 (on page A-23)
PIM345_3 (on page A-24)

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and I/O Modules
Maintenance Manual
Type Designation
Optical I/O Modules SIM1_4/O (on page A-26)
SIM4_2 (on page A-27)

Mixed I/O Module SIM1_4/OE (on page A-28)
EISM I/O Modules EISM_208 (on page A-29)
EISM_244 (on page A-30)
NOTES:
All modules have a handle to facilitate easy removal and
insertion. The handle has been removed from the
illustrations in this section in order not to obscure the
front panel markings.
The traffic of STM-1 modules (I/O or aggregate) can be
monitored via the STM_1 MON connector on the ECU-F
card.
Electrical I/O Modules

If you are employing a TPU 1:1 protection scheme, modules that have TPU
protection should be arranged in pairs, one below the other, with the upper slot
holding the protection module. For a 1:3 protection scheme, all electrical I/O
modules should be grouped either at the left of the modules cage, in slots I1, I2,
I5, and I6, or at the right of the modules cage, in slots I3, I4, I7, and I8.
NOTE: If a TPU protection scheme is employed, a PIM2_21

module can be protected by the TPM2_3, which provides 1:3
protection for up to three PIM2_21 modules.

Maintenance Manual
PIM2_21
The PIM2_21 is a PDH I/O module with 21 x E1 (2 Mbps) electrical balanced
interfaces (two SCSI connectors) to which the traffic cables connect with a
special connector hood. A maximum of eight PIM2_21 modules can be
installed in the I/O cage, totaling 168 E1 interfaces. For unbalanced interfaces,
the PIM2_21 module is connected to the xDDF-21 conversion panel, described
in xDDF-21 Patch Panel for Unbalanced Electrical Connections (on
page A-47).
Figure A-16: PIM2_21 I/O module
Table A-12: PIM2_21 front panel LED indicators

station.
through the module.
MON Monitor Yellow Indicates that the module is being monitored
(single LED for the entire module).

Maintenance Manual
PIM2_63
The PIM2_63 is a PDH I/O module with 63 x E1 (2 Mbps) electrical balanced
interfaces (six SCSI connectors) to which the traffic cables connect with a
special connector hood. A maximum of four PIM2_63 modules can be installed
in the I/O cage (each occupying a double slot), totaling 252 E1 interfaces. For
unbalanced interfaces, each transmit/receive SCSI pair on the module can be
connected to an xDDF-21 conversion panel, as described in xDDF-21 Patch
Panel for Unbalanced Electrical Connections (on page A-47).
Figure A-17: PIM2_63 module

operating normally.
station.
through the module.
MON Monitor Yellow Indicates that the module is being monitored
(single LED for the entire module).

Maintenance Manual
PIM345_3
The PIM345_3 is a PDH I/O module with 3 x E3/DS-3/STS-1 (34/45/51 Mbps)
interfaces (three pairs of DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors). A maximum of eight
PIM345_3 modules can be installed in the I/O cage, totaling 24 interfaces.
NOTE: If a TPU protection scheme is employed, a

PIM345_3 module can be protected by the TPMH_1, which
provides 1:1 protection.
Figure A-18: PIM345_3 I/O module
The front panel has a monitoring point (using a DIN 1.0/2.3 connector) and
these LED indicators:

operating normally.
station.
through the module.
(separate LED for each pair of electrical
connectors).

Maintenance Manual
SIM1_4/E
The SIM1_4/E is an electrical traffic module with 4 x STM-1e (155 Mbps)
interfaces (four pairs of DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors). A maximum of eight
SIM1_4/E modules can be installed in the I/O cage, totaling 32 interfaces.
NOTE: If a TPU protection scheme is employed, a SIM1_4/E

module can be protected by the TPMH_1, which provides 1:1
protection.

ECU-F.
Figure A-19: SIM1_4/E I/O module
Table A-15: SIM1_4/E front panel LED indicators

operating normally.
station.
through the module.
(separate LED for each pair of electrical
connectors).

Maintenance Manual
Optical I/O Modules

In general, it is recommended that all optical modules be concentrated on the
right side of the I/O modules cage to make cable routing simpler.
NOTE: All optical modules use SFP transceivers, which

should be purchased only through ECI Telecom.
SIM1_4/O
The SIM1_4/O is an optical traffic module with four optical STM-1 (155
Mbps) interfaces for SFP transceivers. A maximum of eight SIM1_4/O
modules, totaling 32 interfaces, can be installed in the I/O cage.
ECU-F.
Figure A-20: SIM 1_4/O I/O module
Table A-16: SIM1_4/O front panel LED indicators

station.
through the module.

Maintenance Manual
SIM4_2
The SIM4_2 is an optical traffic module with two STM-4 (622 Mbps)
interfaces for SFP transceivers. A maximum of eight SIM4_2 modules, totaling
16 interfaces, can be installed in the I/O cage.
Figure A-21: SIM4_2 I/O module
The front panel has a 622 Mbps monitoring point with a DIN1.0/2.3 connector,
and these LED indicators:
Table A-17: SIM4_2 front panel LED indicators

operating normally.
station.
through the module.

Maintenance Manual
SIM1_4/OE
The SIM1_4/OE is a mixed electrical/optical traffic module with two optical
STM-1 interfaces with slots for SFP transceivers, and two electrical STM-1
(155 Mbps) interfaces (DIN 1.0/2.3 connectors). A maximum of eight
SIM1_4/OE modules totaling 32 interfaces can be installed in the I/O cage.
ECU-F.
Figure A-22: SIM1_4/OE I/O module
Table A-18: SIM1_4/OE front panel LED indicators

station.
through the module.
ON Laser Green Lights when optical traffic is being transmitted
(separate LED for each SFP transceiver or pair
of electrical connectors).

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and EISM I/O Modules
Maintenance Manual
EISM I/O Modules
NOTE: All EISM optical interfaces use SFP transceivers.
The EISM provides a flexible configuration of eight Ethernet interfaces. There

are three types of EISMs, offering different optical and electrical connection
options.
An XDM-100 shelf can accommodate up to four EISMs, either working
independently or protecting each other. EISMs occupy two slots.
Supported EISMs are:
EISM_208
The EISM_208 is an electrical Fast Ethernet module including eight
10/100BaseT ports with RJ45 connectors, which can be connected with these
cables:
10/100BaseT CAT5 UTP 2-pair
1000BaseT CAT5 UTP 4-pair
A maximum of four EISM_208 modules, totaling 32 interfaces, can be
installed in the I/O cage.
Figure A-23: EISM_208 I/O module

EISM I/O Modules XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Table A-19: EISM_208 front panel LED indicators

AC Module Green Lights steadily when the module is
active powered and operating normally.
Flashes during software download from
the MXC, after powerup, reset, or when
new software is available from the
management station.
TR Traffic Orange Lights when there is traffic cross-
connecting through the module.
AC Port active Green Lights when Ethernet traffic is being
transmitted/received (separate LED for
each port).
LNK Link Green/Yellow Indicates that the link is active; lights
green for 100BaseT and yellow for
10BaseT (separate LED for each port).
EISM_244
The EISM_244 is a mixed optical/electrical Fast Ethernet module with four
electrical 10/100BaseT ports with RJ45 connectors, and four optical ports (two
GbE/FX ports and two FX only ports) for the insertion of SFP transceivers.
The cable options for the different ports are:
Table A-20: Port cable options
Port Type Connector Fiber/Cable options

1-2 Optical LC 100BaseFX multimode 50 m
100BaseFX multimode 62.5 m
100BaseFX single mode 9 m
1000BaseSX
1000BaseLX
1000BaseZX
5-8 Electrical RJ45 10/100BaseT CAT5 UTP 2-pair

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and EISM I/O Modules
Maintenance Manual

AC Module Green Lights steadily when the module is
active powered and operating normally.
management station.
transmitted/received (separate LED for
each port).
LNK Link Green/Yellow Indicates that the link is active; lights
green for 100BaseT and yellow for
10BaseT (separate LED for each port).

EISM I/O Modules XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
EISM_226
The EISM_226 is a mixed electrical/optical Fast Ethernet module with six
electrical 10/100BaseT ports, and two GbE/FX optical ports for the insertion of
SFP transceivers.
The cable options for the different ports are:
Table A-22: Port cable options
Port Type Connector Fiber/Cable options

1000BaseSX
1000BaseLX
1000BaseZX
3-8 Electrical RJ45 10/100BaseT CAT5 UTP 2-pair

AC Module Green Lights steadily when the module is powered
active and operating normally.
station.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Tributary Protection Unit (TPU)
Maintenance Manual

transmitted/received (separate LED for each
port).
LNK Link Green/yellow Indicates that the link is active; lights green
for 100BaseT and yellow for 10BaseT
(separate LED for each port).
Tributary Protection Unit (TPU)

The optional TPU shelf can be mounted on top of the XDM-100 shelf to add
I/O protection capability to the system.
Each Tributary Protection Module (TPM) is connected to both operating and
protection I/O modules in the XDM-100 shelf. If a failure is detected in one of
the operating I/O modules, the Tributary Control (TC) module in the TPU
switches the traffic from the operating I/O module to the protection module.
There are two possible configurations:
1:1 protection, where a redundant module is installed to protect an
operating module
1:3 protection, where a redundant module is installed to protect three
operating modules
The TPU shelf is 231 mm deep, 450 mm wide, and 75 mm high, and comprises
a single cage with slots for the TC module and the TPMs. The TPU connects to
a connector on top of the XDM-100 shelf that provides the power and control
buses required for its operation.
The modules are distributed as follows:
The rightmost TPU slot is allocated for the TC module. The TC module is
described in Tributary Control (TC) Module (on page A-34).
The other four slots are used for any combination of TPMs (single-slot or
double-slot modules are supported). Two types of TPMs for 1:1 or 1:3
protection schemes are available. The modules are described in Tributary
Protection Modules (TPMs) (on page A-36).

Tributary Protection Unit (TPU) XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Figure A-26: Shelf with TPU
Tributary Control (TC) Module

The TC module is installed in the rightmost slot of the TPU shelf. It is
connected through a connector on the top of the XDM-100 shelf to the DC and
control buses of the MXC-100 cards via the TPU backplane. The TC module
controls and monitors the switching of traffic from I/O to protection modules
by relays in the corresponding TPMs. It also transfers power from the
MXC-100 card to the TPU modules. Extraction/insertion of the TC module
does not affect traffic.
CAUTION: A microswitch is located under the tab to block

control of the TPMs when the TC is extracted. Therefore, if
the TC module is not properly inserted and/or one of its
screws is not secured in place, I/O protection will not be
implemented.

Maintenance Manual
Figure A-27: TC module
Table A-24: TC front panel LED indicators

ACTIVE Green Lights steadily when the module is powered and operating
normally.
Flashes during software download from the MXC, after powerup,
reset, or when new software is available from the management
station.

Maintenance Manual
Tributary Protection Modules (TPMs)

The TPU has four slots for TPMs. The modules are connected to the main and
protection I/O modules by traffic cables, and the clients traffic is connected
directly to the TPMs.
TPMs support 1:1 and 1:3 protection schemes for the electrical PIMs and
SIMs, as follows:
TPMs for a 1:1 protection scheme, where one protection module is
connected to a single I/O module. These modules occupy one slot in the
TPU.
TPMs for a 1:3 protection scheme, where one protection module is
connected to two or three I/O modules. These modules occupy two slots in
the TPU.
NOTE: TPMs must be inserted in the slot above the protected

I/O modules. For example, modules I1 and I5 can only be
protected by the module in slot TPM1 (leftmost slot).
The modules can be installed in any of these combinations:

Four 1:1 modules
Two 1:1 modules and one 1:3 module
Two 1:3 modules
The modules include:
TPM2_3 (on page A-37)
TPMH_1 (on page A-38)

Maintenance Manual
TPM2_3
The TPM2_3 provides 1:3 protection for up to three PIM2_21 I/O modules. It
is activated by the MXC-100 via the TC module, enabling a single I/O backup
module to protect any of the three other I/O modules when a failure is detected.
The TPM2_3 is connected as follows:
The traffic connector on the protection I/O module is connected to the
PIM2_21 PROTECT 100-pin SCSI connector on the TPM2_3
The traffic connectors on the three active I/O modules are connected to the
PIM 2_21#1, PIM 2_21#2, and PIM 2_21#3 100-pin SCSI connectors on
the TPM2_3
The traffic cables from the DDF are connected to connectors DDF#1,
DDF#2, and DDF#3 on the TPM2_3
Figure A-28: TPM2_3 protection module
Table A-25: TPM2_3 front panel LED indicators

operating normally.
FL Fail Red Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is
detected.
1, 2, 3 Orange Normally off. Lights when the respective active
I/O module (#1, #2, or #3) is not functioning,
and traffic is being transferred through the
protection I/O module.

Maintenance Manual
TPMH_1
The TPMH_1 provides 1:1 protection for:
A single PIM345_3 I/O module, or
A single SIM1_4/E module
The module is activated by the MXC-100 via the TC module, enabling a single
I/O backup module to protect a single I/O module when a failure is detected.
The TPMH_1 is connected as follows:
The protection I/O module is connected to the PROTECT connector on the
TPMH_1
The active I/O module is connected to the MAIN connector on the
TPMH_1
The traffic cables are connected to the OUT/IN connectors on the TPMH_1
Figure A-29: TPMH_1 protection module
Table A-26: TPMH_1 front panel LED indicators

FL Fail Red Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is
detected.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Accessories for Rack Installation
Maintenance Manual

PROT Protection Orange Normally off. Lights when the respective
active I/O module is not functioning and traffic
is being transferred through the protection I/O
module.
Accessories for Rack Installation

ECI Telecom offers a variety of accessories for efficient and optimal
installation of equipment in racks. This section describes the main types of
accessories. If you need custom modification to standard items, contact ECI
Telecoms Optical Networks Division Support team, or your ECI Telecom
sales representative.
XDM-100 Rack Alarm Panel (xRAP-100)

The xRAP-100 is a power distribution and alarm panel for XDM family
shelves installed in racks. The xRAP-100 performs the following main
functions:
Power distribution for up to four XDM shelves. The nominal DC power
voltage is -48 or -60 VDC. Since XDM shelves can use redundant power
sources, the xRAP-100 supports connection to two separate DC power
circuits. The internal circuits of the xRAP-100 are powered whenever at
least one power source is connected. The presence of DC power within the
xRAP-100 is indicated by a POWER ON indicator.
Each DC power circuit of each shelf is protected by a circuit breaker, which
also serves as a power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The
required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied
with the XDM shelves, and therefore their current rating is in accordance
with the order requirements. The 5-pin high power connector supplies
power to XDM-1000 and XDM-2000 shelves. The 3-pin connector supplies
power to XDM-100, XDM-200, XDM-400, and XDM-500 shelves.
The xRAP-100 is designed to support one high-powered shelf and three

regular shelves, or four regular shelves.
The circuit breakers are installed during the xRAP-100 installation. To

prevent accidental changing of a circuit breakers state, the circuit breakers
can be reached only after opening the front cover of the xRAP-100. The
circuit breaker state (ON or OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.
Bay alarm indications. The xRAP-100 includes four alarm indicators, one
for each alarm severity. When alarms of different severities are received
simultaneously, the different alarm indications light simultaneously.

Accessories for Rack Installation XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
A buzzer is activated whenever a Major or Critical alarm is present in

XDM-100 shelves installed in the rack.
Connection of alarms from up to four XDM-100 shelves, each shelf with up

to four alarm inputs and two alarm outputs.
The following figure shows the front panel of the xRAP-100, and the table lists
the functions of the front panel components, corresponding to the figure callout
numbers.
Figure A-30: xRAP-100 front panel
Table A-27: xRAP-100 front panel component functions
No. Designation Function

1. SOURCE A Translucent cover for the four circuit breakers (designated
SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3, SHELF 4 one per
XDM-100 shelf installed in the rack). These circuit
breakers are used as ON/OFF power switches and
overcurrent protection for the DC power source A.
2. Buzzer Operates when at least one unacknowledged Major or
Critical alarm is present in the shelves connected to the
xRAP-100.
3. POWER ON Pushbutton with green indicator, which lights whenever at
(TEST) least one DC power source is connected to the xRAP-100.
Pressing the pushbutton activates the buzzer and turns the
indicators on for test purposes.
4. CRITICAL Red indicator, lights when the highest unacknowledged
alarm severity present in one of the shelves connected to
the xRAP-100 is a critical alarm.
5. MAJOR Orange indicator lights when the highest unacknowledged
alarm severity present in the shelves connected to the
xRAP-100 is a major alarm.
6. MINOR Yellow indicator, lights when the highest
unacknowledged alarm severity present in the shelves
connected to the xRAP-100 is a minor alarm.

Maintenance Manual
7. WARNING White indicator, lights when the highest unacknowledged

alarm severity present in the shelves connected to the
xRAP-100 is a warning.
8. SOURCE B Same as Item 1 for DC source B.
The xRAP-100 connectors are located on its circuit board, as shown in the
following figure. The table lists the connector functions. The connector pin
assignment is provided in Connection Data (on page C-1).
Figure A-31: xRAP-100 connectors
Table A-28: xRAP-100 connectors
1, 2, 3, 4 Shelf Alarms Four 36-pin SCSI connectors designated SHELF 1,

SHELF 2, SHELF 3 and SHELF 4, for connecting
alarm input and output lines to XDM shelves and
other equipment installed in the rack.
5 ALARM IN/OUT 68-pin SCSI connector, for connecting alarm input
and output lines to the customer alarm monitoring
facility.
6, 7,8, 9 Shelves DC input Four 3-pin, D-type connectors designated Shelf 1,
power Shelf 2, Shelf 3, and Shelf 4, for connecting DC
power to XDM-100 shelves.
10 Shelf DC input, The lines of the Shelf 4 connector are also
high power connected to a 5-pin, D-type connector for
connecting a high-power XDM shelf.

Maintenance Manual
XDM Rack Alarm Panel (xRAP)

The xRAP is a power distribution and alarm panel for any two XDM shelves
installed in racks. The xRAP performs the following main functions:
Power distribution to one or two XDM shelves. The nominal DC power
voltage is -48 or -60 VDC. Since XDM shelves can use redundant power
sources, the xRAP supports connection to two separate DC power circuits.
The internal circuits of the xRAP are powered whenever at least one power
source is connected. The presence of DC power within the xRAP is
indicated by a POWER ON indicator.
Each DC power circuit of each shelf is protected by a circuit breaker, which
also serves as a power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The
required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied
with the XDM shelves, and therefore their current rating is in accordance
with the order requirements. The maximum current that can be supplied to
each XDM shelf is up to 60 A.
The circuit breakers are installed during xRAP installation. To prevent

accidental changing of circuit breaker state, the circuit breakers can be
reached only after opening the front cover of the xRAP. The circuit breaker
state (ON or OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.
Bay alarm indications. The xRAP includes four alarm indicators, one for
each alarm severity. At any time, only the indicator corresponding to the
highest unacknowledged alarm severity present in the XDM shelves
installed in the rack lights.
A buzzer is activated whenever an unacknowledged alarm is present in
XDM shelves installed in the rack.
Connection of up to eight external alarm sources to XDM shelves installed

in the rack, and connection of up to eight alarm outputs of XDM shelves to
external alarm monitors, for example, an operator console.
The allocation of alarm lines is performed by means of a set of internal
switches, which are set during xRAP installation.
The ground references of the input and output alarm lines on the two sides
of the xRAP are isolated by active circuits located within the xRAP.
The following figure shows the front panel of the xRAP and the table below
lists the functions of the front panel components. The index numbers in the
table correspond to those in the figure.

Maintenance Manual
Figure A-32: xRAP front panel
Table A-29: xRAP front panel component functions

1. SOURCE A Translucent cover for the two circuit breakers (designated
SHELF 1 and SHELF 2 one per XDM shelf installed in
the rack). These circuit breakers are used as ON/OFF power
switches and overcurrent protection for the DC power
source A.
2. Buzzer Operates when at least one unacknowledged alarm is present
in the shelves connected to the xRAP.
3. POWER ON Pushbutton with green indicator, which lights whenever at
(TEST) least one DC power source is connected to the xRAP.
Pressing the pushbutton activates the buzzer and turns the
indicators on for test purposes.
4. CRITICAL Red indicator, lights when the highest unacknowledged
alarm severity present in the shelves connected to the xRAP
is a critical alarm.
5. MAJOR Orange indicator, lights when the highest unacknowledged
is a major alarm.
6. MINOR Yellow indicator, lights when the highest unacknowledged
is a minor alarm.
7. WARNING White indicator lights when the highest unacknowledged
is a warning.
8. SOURCE B Same as Item 1 for DC source B.

Maintenance Manual
The following figure shows the xRAP connectors, and slide switches located
on its rear side, and the table lists the connector functions. The connector pin
assignment is provided in Connection Data (on page C-1). The index numbers
in the table correspond to those in the figure.
8 9 10 11
1 2 3
ALARM
7&8 5&6 3&4 1&2
321 321 321 321 SHELF

RAP
4 5 6 7
Figure A-33: xRAP connector and slide switch panel
Table A-30: xRAP connectors and slide switches
1, 2, 3 EXTERNAL Three 25-pin D-type connectors,

ALARM/CONTROL designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, and
SHELF 3, for connecting alarm input
and output lines to XDM shelves and
other equipment installed in the rack.
4, 5, 6 RAP Three 9-pin D-type connectors,
designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, and
SHELF 3, for connecting alarm relays
and buzzer activation lines to XDM
shelves and other equipment installed
in the rack.
7 CONTROL 50-pin D-type connector, for
CONNECTION connecting alarm indications and input
and output alarm lines to the customer
alarm monitoring facility.
8, 9, 10, 11 1&2, 3&4, 5&6, 7&8 Four slide switches used to route the
facility alarm lines to the input and
output lines of the XDM shelves
connected to the xRAP.

Maintenance Manual
Cable Guiding Accessories

Different accessories are available for guiding cables and fibers in rack
installations.
Cable guide frame

The cable guide frame for the XDM-100 is used to obtain a tidy route of
electrical interface cables connecting to the panels of modules (or to the panels
of the TPMs in I/O protected installations).
The unit is fastened to the rack side rails just above the top of the XDM-100
shelf.
Figure A-34: Cable guide
Cable guiding rods

The cable guiding rods are used to keep the cables and fibers neatly arranged
between the rack rails. The cable guiding rods are attached with two captive
screws to the rear rack rails shown in the following figure. This rod is for use
only in ETSI B racks.
Figure A-35: Using cable guiding rods

Maintenance Manual
Fiber guide for ETSI A racks

ECI Telecom offers a fiber guide to help neatly route fibers in ETSI A racks.
The guide also helps to keep the recommended bend radius of the routed fibers.
Figure A-36: Fiber guide for ETSI A racks
Fiber guide for ETSI B racks

The fiber guide for installation in ETSI B racks helps to neatly route the fibers
in the rack and also helps to keep the minimum bend radius of the fibers. The
guide also helps to rout the fibers towards the conduits, attached to the middle
of both rack sides.
Figure A-37: Fiber guide for ETSI B racks

Maintenance Manual
Fiber Storage Tray (FST)

When optical modules are used, the XDM-100 can be supplied with a fiber
storage tray, where a length of surplus optical fiber is stored to enable hot
module replacement without disconnecting fibers from other modules in the
shelf. The FST can hold up to 48 x 3 m, 2 mm fibers.
The FST can be opened in two positions:
Halfway (first click when pulling the tray out)
Completely (to enable threading of the fibers in the tray)
Figure A-38: Fiber Storage Tray, top view
xDDF-21 Patch Panel for Unbalanced Electrical

Connections
When the user has unbalanced 75 interfaces, the optional xDDF-21 patch
panel enables connection and conversion of these interfaces to the balanced 120
interfaces of the PIM2_21 or PIM2_63 modules used in the XDM-100 shelf.
The xDDF-21 is 1U high, and can be installed in ETSI A and ETSI B racks, as
well as in 19 racks. It has a capacity of 21 E1 lines, so that a separate
xDDF-21 is required for each PIM2_21 module or three such units for each
PIM2_63 module used in the XDM-100 shelf.
The figure below shows a general view of the patch panel. The channel
numbers of the various connectors are marked on the patch panel, and the
inside of the cover contains a label for cable identification, as illustrated in
Label on inside of door of xDDF-21 patch panel (on page A-48). The

Maintenance Manual
customers cables are connected to the connectors inside the patch panel, while
the cables leading from the PIM2_21 or PIM2_63 module are connected to the
SCSI connectors at the rear of the xDDF-21. A special split cable is available to
convert the output from the PIM2_21 or PIM2_63 module to SCSI connector
pairs at the back of the xDDF-21.
The xDDF-21 can be supplied with BT43, DIN1.6/5.6, or BNC connectors for
connection to the customers traffic cables.
Figure A-39: xDDF-21 patch panel for unbalanced E1 interfaces
Figure A-40: Label inside xDDF-21 patch panel door

Maintenance Manual
Optical Distribution Frame (ODF)

When there is a large number of optical fibers connected to an XDM-100 shelf,
additional connection arrangements may be required.
The solution recommended by ECI Telecom is to use an optical distribution
frame installed in the XDM-100 racks to terminate the external fibers with the
desired type of optical connectors.
The ODF provides a flexible and reliable solution for interfacing between
outside plant optical fiber cables and fiber optical terminal equipment. It is
designed to handle termination, splicing and storage for excess length of
pigtails and patch cords.
The unit is 1U high, and can be installed in ETSI A and ETSI B racks, as well
as in 19" racks using its configurable rack mounting brackets. An additional set
of brackets supplied with the installation kit, enables installation in 7' bay, 23"
racks. The ODF is available with 12 or 24 ports, and SC, FC or LC connectors.
Figure A-41: ODF internal view
All fiber connections are made on a swing-out tray that opens to the right in
90, and houses the splicing trays, optical adapter panels, and the fiber support.
Left side tray opening is available per order. The swing-out tray enables quick
and easy access to all internal parts for connection or maintenance activities.

Maintenance Manual
The fiber connections are protected by a front cover, which latches to the
assembly, and prevents unintended disconnection of fibers.
Figure A-42: ODF front panel
Optical terminal fibers can enter the ODF from the right or left side, and be
connected to the optical adapters from one side. Pigtails connect to the adapters
from the other side. Excess length of pigtails and patch cords are threaded on a
fiber support that maintains the minimum bend radius to prevent fiber breaks.
A durable and robust tube leads the external fibers cable to the swing-out tray,
and protects them from breaks. The adapters are arranged on panels, in groups
of four or two (depending on the total number of ports). A large space between
the adapters enables easy access to each individual fiber and quick
reconfiguration.
Optical Patch Panel (OPP)

When a large number of equipment optical ports have to be connected to the
optical network, and splicing to external fibers (like in the ODF) is not
required, ECI Telecoms Optical Networks Division recommends the use of the
OPP.
The OPP is designed for terminating and distributing optical fibers, and can
work as a cross-connection and testing point between the optical network and
the equipment. It provides a quick and flexible solution for cable management.
The OPP is 1U high, and can be installed in ETSI A and ETSI B racks, as well
as in 19 racks using its configurable rack mounting brackets. The OPP is
available with 12 or 24 ports, and SC, LC and FC connectors.
All connections are made on the internal connectors panel, which
accommodates duplex connectors. This prevents unintended disconnection of
fibers, and supports the connection reliability. The optical fibers are connected
to the connectors from both sides. The fibers enter the OPP from the left or
right side and are threaded on special supports that maintain the minimum bend
radius to prevent fiber breaks.
A two-position moving tray provides easy access to the fibers for management
or maintenance purposes.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Cables
Maintenance Manual
Figure A-43: Optical Patch Panel, top view
Cables
The XDM-100 is supplied with a number of cables, as described in the
following table.
Table A-31: Cables
Cable type Description Interconnect Length

SCSI 50-pin x 2 -21 E1 cable PIM2_21 or PIM2_63 From 5 m to 100 m
E1 to DDF
DIN1.0/2.3 to Single coax cable PIM345 to DDF From 5 m to 60 m
DIN1.0/2.3 SIM/SAM1_4 to DDF
(electrical interfaces)
LC to LC fiber Single fiber patch All optical interfaces to From 0.5 m to 10 m
cord ODF
RJ45 to RJ45 UTP EISM to DDF From 0.5 m to 5 m
Power-3W3 Power cable XDM-100 (MXC) to 2 m and 2.7 m
xRAP/xRAP-100
Alarm to xRAP-100 Alarm signals ECU to xRAP/xRAP-100 2 m and 3 m

Cables XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Cable type Description Interconnect Length

Alarm to client Alarm signals ECU to client connection 15 m, 35 m, and
panel 45 m
F-Channel Local connection of ECU to notebook or PC 3m
the eCraft
T3/T4 (Timing ) Timing input/output ECU to DDF 3m
Exp. Management Ethernet hub ECU to other network 2m
element
Main Management Ethernet port From EMS to ECU or 3m
from ECU to other
network element
USB Future use Future use 3m
SCSI 50 to SCSI E1 IOP PIM2_21 to TPU Jumpers
100
8W8 to 6/8 x single High rate IOP PIM345_3 to TPU or Jumpers
coaxial cable SIM1_4/E to TPU

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Cables
Maintenance Manual

B
B XDM-100H
In This Appendix
Overview ....................................................................................B-1
XDM-100H Description .............................................................B-2
XDM-100H Configuration Options............................................B-3
I/O Modules................................................................................B-7
TPU/OCU Shelf........................................................................B-11
CWDM Networking Modules ..................................................B-11
Installing the TPU/OCU ...........................................................B-21
Overview
The XDM-100H integrates the Ethernet, SDH, and PDH capabilities of the
XDM-100 with the CWDM (Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing)
functionality of the XDM-200. It is compact, fully modular and redundant.
NOTE: The XDM-100H is a cost option and can only be

implemented if your XDM-100 is licensed appropriately.
A TPU/OCU (Tributary Protection Unit/Optical CWDM Unit) shelf can be

mounted on top of the XDM-100 basic shelf to add I/O protection and CWDM
optical networking capabilities. The TPU/OCU is identical in physical
dimensions to the TPU and supports any mix of TPMs (Tributary Protection
Modules), OADMs, mux/demux, and couplers/splitters. Up to two TPU/OCU
shelves can be installed on the basic XDM-100 shelf.
Due to the high capacity of the traffic carried by the XDM-100H, protection is
of utmost importance. The protection means incorporated into the system
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary B-1

XDM-100H Description XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
ensure traffic reliability. These include hardware redundancy of specified

critical circuits, highly reliable trail protection mechanisms, and OCH 1+1
(Optical Channel) protection and OMSP (Optical Multiplex Section Protection)
for line protection.
XDM-100H Description
The XDM-100H consists of the following units:
Basic XDM-100 shelf as described in Shelf Overview (on page A-2). The
shelf includes the ECU or ECU-F (External Connection Unit), two
MXC-100 cards, the I/O modules cage with eight slots, and the FCU (Fan
Control Unit).
Each MXC-100 card houses an NVM module, which contains the licensed
optional software.
The eight slots of the I/O modules cage support installation of XDM-100
I/O modules, as well as XDM-200 CWDM I/O modules (transponders and
combiners).
A TPU/OCU shelf, mounted on top of the basic XDM-100 shelf, with five
slots: four for supporting any mix of mux/demux, OADM,
splitters/couplers and TPMs, and one for a Tributary Control (TC) module.
One or two TPU/OCUs can be mounted on the basic XDM-100 shelf.
NOTE: When two TPU/OCU shelves are installed, the

second (upper) TPU/OCU does not support low order (E1 or
DS1) signals due to cabling limitations.
B-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and XDM-100H Configuration Options
Maintenance Manual
Figure B-1: TPU/OCU shelf
XDM-100H Configuration Options

The XDM-100H has three configuration options:
Basic shelf
Expanded shelf (with one TPU/OCU)
Double-expanded shelf (with one TPU/OCU, and one OCU)
All these options can be configured based on the type of system license
purchased.

XDM-100H Configuration Options XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
TPU and OCU Slots Designation

One or two TPU or OCU units can be mounted on top of the basic XDM-100.
The cage on top of the basic shelf is designated M1; the cage on top of the M1
cage is designated M2.
Slots in M1 are: M1-1 to M1-5
Slots in M2 are: M2-1 to M2-5
Figure B-2: TPU and OCU slots designation
When the hybrid option is enabled, the M1 cage is designated TPU/OCU. It

can accommodate any mix of TPM and CWDM modules.
The M2 cage is always designated OCU, and is therefore only assembled when
the hybrid option is enabled. It can accommodate only CWDM modules.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and XDM-100H Configuration Options
Maintenance Manual
Assignment Options for TPU and OCU Cages

The following figure shows the layout of the basic XDM-100 shelf
configuration.
Figure B-3: Basic XDM-100
Table B-1: Supported modules in basic XDM-100
I/O modules cage slots I1 to I8

Regular Hybrid
Only XDM-100 I/O modules Any mix of I/O modules (PIMs, SIMs,
(PIMs, SIMs, EISMs) EISMs) and CWDM modules
(transponders and combiners)
The following figure shows the layout of the expanded XDM-100 shelf
configuration.
Figure B-4: Expanded XDM-100

XDM-100H Configuration Options XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Table B-2: Supported modules in expanded XDM-100
I/O modules cage slots I1 to I8 M1 modules cage slots M1-1 to M1-4

Regular Hybrid Regular Hybrid
Only XDM-100 Any mix of I/O Only TPMs Any mix of TPM and
I/O modules modules (PIMs, CWDM optical
(PIMs, SIMs, SIMs, EISMs) and (mux/demux,
EISMs) CWDM modules splitters/couplers,
(transponders and OADM) modules
combiners)
NOTE: Slot M1-5 can accommodate TC modules only.
The following figure shows the layout of the double-expanded XDM-100 shelf
configuration.
Figure B-5: Double-expanded XDM-100

Maintenance Manual
Table B-3: Supported modules in double-expanded XDM-100
I/O modules cage slots M1 modules cage slots M2 modules cage

I1 to I8 M1-1 to M1-4 slots M2-1 to M2-4
Regular Hybrid Regular Hybrid Regular Hybrid

Only I/O Any mix of Only TPMs Any mix of -- Only
modules I/O modules TPM and CWDM
(PIMs, SIMs, (PIMs, CWDM optical
EISMs) SIMs, optical (mux/demux
EISMs) and (mux/demux, ,
CWDM splitters/couple splitters/cou
modules rs, OADM) plers,
(transponder modules OADM)
s and modules
combiners)
NOTE: Slots M1-5 and M2-5 can accommodate TC modules

only.
I/O Modules
Eight slots are available in the XDM-100H I/O modules cage to accommodate
the modules including:
Single PDH I/O Modules (PIMs) and SDH I/O Modules (SIMs) can be
inserted into any of the I1 through I8 positions without any limitations.
CWDM I/O modules can be inserted into any of the I1 through I8 positions
without limitations. Various types of I/O modules with a variety of client
interfaces for SDH, data services, and CWDM line transceivers are
available.
Ethernet Interface and Switching Modules (EISMs) and the PIM2_63
modules occupy two slots, and can be inserted in slots I1-I2, I3-I4, I5-I6, or
I7-I8.
NOTE: Optical SIMs, some EISMs, and the CWDM I/O

modules incorporate SFP transceivers with LC connectors,
which should be purchased only through ECI Telecom.
The various PIMs and SIMs are described in Electrical I/O Modules (on page
A-21) and Mixed I/O Module. The EISMs are described in EISM I/O Modules
(on page A-29)

Maintenance Manual
CWDM I/O modules are described in the following sections and include:
CRPT25_2C (on page B-8)
CTRP25_2C (on page B-9)
CCMB25_2D (on page B-10)
CRPT25_2C
The CRPT25_2C is an optical traffic module for two bidirectional continuous
transponders (100 Mbps to 2.7 Gbps), each with two SFP transceivers: a 2.5
Gbps CWDM line SFP and an STM-16 client interface, for A/D mode only.
Figure B-6: CRPT25_2C module
Table B-4: CRPT25_2C front panel LED indicators
Marking Full Color Function

name
station.
TR Traffic (Orange) (Not used in this module.)
LASER Laser Green Lights when traffic is being transmitted
ON Active (separate LED for each of the SFP
transceivers).

Maintenance Manual
CTRP25_2C
The CTRP25_2C is an optical traffic module for two bidirectional continuous
transponders (100 Mbps to 2.7Gbps), each with two SFP transceivers: a 2.5
Gbps CWDM line SFP and an STM-16 client SFP interface, or two line SFPs
for regenerator mode.
Figure B-7: CTRP25_2C module
Table B-5: CTRP25_2C front panel LED indicators
Marking Full Color Function

name
operating normally.
station.
LASER Laser Green Lights when traffic is being transmitted (separate
ON Active LED for each of the SFP transceivers).

Maintenance Manual
CCMB25_2D
The CCMB25_2D is an optical traffic combiner for two GbE/FC/FICON client
SFP transceivers and one 2.7 Gbps CWDM line interface with G.709 FEC
framing.
Figure B-8: CCMB25_2D module
Table B-6: CCMB25_2D front panel LED indicators

station.
LASER Laser Green Lights when traffic is being transmitted
ON Active (separate LED for each of the SFP
transceivers).

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and TPU/OCU Shelf
Maintenance Manual
TPU/OCU Shelf
The TPU/OCU shelf can be mounted on top of the basic XDM-100 shelf to add
I/O protection and CWDM optical networking capabilities to the system.
The TPU/OCU is 231 mm deep, 450 mm wide, and 75 mm high, and
comprises a single cage with five slots. One or two TPU/OCUs can be installed
on the XDM-100. The first connects to a connector on top of the XDM-100
that provides the power and control buses required for its operation. In case an
additional TPU/OCU is required, it connects similarly to a connector on top of
the first one.
The modules are distributed as follows:
The rightmost slot is allocated to the TC (Tributary Control) module. The
TC module is described in TC Module (on page B-12).
The other four slots can accommodate any combination of TPM and
CWDM optical (mux/demux, OADM, or splitter/coupler) modules. The
TPMs are described in Tributary Protection Modules (TPMs) (on
page A-36). For a description of the optical networking modules refer to
CWDM Optical Networking Modules (on page B-11).
All connectors on the optical networking modules are LC connectors.
CWDM Networking Modules

The various CWDM optical networking modules are described in the following
sections and include:
TC Module (on page B-12)
MO_CMD4C Mux/demux Module (on page B-13)
MO_CMD8 Mux/demux Module (on page B-14)
MO_CMD4C_E Mux/demux Module (on page B-15)
MO_CMD4SL Mux/demux Module (on page B-16)
MO_COADM1AB_xx OADM Module (on page B-17)
MO_COADM2AB_Gxx OADM Module (on page B-18)
MO_4CP4SPMM50 Splitter/Coupler Module (on page B-19)
MO_4CP4SPMM62 Splitter/Coupler Module (on page B-20)
MO_4CP4SPSM Splitter/Coupler Module (on page B-21)

CWDM Networking Modules XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
TC Module
The TC module is installed in the rightmost slot of the TPU/OCU shelf. It
controls and monitors the TPU/OCU modules, and transfers power from the
MXC to these modules. Extraction of the TC module does not affect traffic.
CAUTION: A microswitch is located under the tab to block

control of the TPU/OCU modules when the TC is extracted.
Therefore, if the TC module is not properly inserted and/or
one of its screws is not secured in place, I/O protection will
not be implemented.
Figure B-9: TC module
Table B-7: TC front panel LED indicators

ACTIVE Green Lights steadily when the module is powered and
operating normally.
Flashes during software download from the MXC, after
powerup, reset, or when new software is available from
the management station.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and CWDM Networking Modules
Maintenance Manual
MO_CMD4C Mux/Demux Module

The MO_CMD4C is a four-channel, nonexpandable mux/demux for channel
wavelengths 1511, 1531, 1551, and 1571 nm, with a built-in 1310 nm
OSC filter.
Figure B-10: MO_CMD4C module
Table B-8: MO_CMD4C front panel LED indicators

station.

Maintenance Manual
MO_CMD8 Mux/Demux Module

The MO_CMD8 is an eight-channel nonexpandable mux/demux, for channel
wavelengths 1471, 1491, 1511, 1531, 1551, 1571, 1591, and 1611 nm, with a
built-in 1310 nm OSC filter.
Figure B-11: MO_CMD8 module
Table B-9: MO_CMD8 front panel LED indicators

management station.

Maintenance Manual
MO_CMD4C_E Mux/Demux Module

The MO_CMD4C_E is a four-channel mux/demux expandable to eight
channels for channel wavelengths 1511, 1531, 1551, and 1571 nm, with a
built-in 1310 nm OSC filter.
Figure B-12: MO_CMD4C_E module
Table B-10: MO_CMD4C_E front panel LED indicators

station.

Maintenance Manual
MO_CMD4SL Mux/Demux Module

The MO_CMD4SL is a four-channel expansion mux/demux for channel
wavelengths 1471, 1491, 1591, and 1611 nm, without an OSC filter.
Figure B-13: MO_CMD4SL module
Table B-11: MO_CMD4SL front panel LED indicators

station.

Maintenance Manual
MO_COADM1AB_xx OADM Module

The MO_COADM1AB_xx is a single-channel OADM module with a 1310 nm
built-in OSC filter in AB configuration, and one I/O port. The channel dropped
by the OADM is designated by the xx in the module name.
Figure B-14: Typical MO_COADM1AB_xx module
Table B-12: MO_COADM1AB_xx front panel LED indicators

management station.

Maintenance Manual
MO_COADM2AB_Gxx OADM Module

The MO_COADM2AB_Gxx is an OADM module that adds/drops two
channels. It has a 1310 nm built-in OSC filter, in AB configuration, with two
I/O ports. The group of two channels dropped by the OADM is designated by
the xx in the module name.
Figure B-15: Typical MO_COADM2AB_Gxx module
Table B-13: MO_COADM2AB_Gxx front panel LED indicators

station.

Maintenance Manual
MO_4CP4SPMM50 Splitter/Coupler Module

The MO_4CP4SPMM50 is a module with four splitters and four couplers
designed to provide optical protection for a 850 or 1310 nm 50 m multimode
fiber.
Figure B-16: MO_4CP4SPMM50 module
Table B-14: MO_4CP4SPMM50 front panel LED indicators

operating normally.

Maintenance Manual
MO_4CP4SPMM62 Splitter/Coupler Module

The MO_4CP4SPMM62 is a module with four splitters and four couplers
designed to provide optical protection for a 850 or 1310 nm 62.5 m
multimode fiber.
Figure B-17: MO_4CP4SPMM62 module
Table B-15: MO_4CP4SPMM62 front panel LED indicators


XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Installing the TPU/OCU
Maintenance Manual
MO_4CP4SPSM Splitter/Coupler Module

The MO_4CP4SPSM is a module with four splitters and four couplers
designed to provide optical protection for a 1310/1550 nm single mode fiber.
Figure B-18: MO_4CP4SPSM module
Table B-16: MO_4CP4SPSM front panel LED indicators

Installing the TPU/OCU

For the installation of the basic XDM-100 shelf, refer to Installing the
XDM-100 Shelf in the Rack (see "Installing the Shelf in the Rack" on
page 3-45).
The installation of a single TPU/OCU shelf on the basic XDM-100 shelf is
identical to the installation of a TPU covered in Installing a TPU on the
XDM-100 Shelf (on page 3-84).

Installing the TPU/OCU XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Adding a Second TPU/OCU

If your XDM-100 already has a TPU/OCU, it is possible to upgrade your
system and add an additional TPU/OCU cage on top of the first at a later stage,
provided you have left space on the rack for this possibility. There should be at
least 150 mm space above the expanded XDM-100 to install the TPU/OCU.
The second TPU/OCU cage can be installed without disconnecting any of the
expanded XDM-100H system cables and fibers, and without affecting traffic
which is not going via the TPU/OCU.
CAUTION: This procedure should be carried out only by a

Field Engineer who has been trained by ECI Telecom.
To install an additional TPU/OCU on the expanded

XDM-100H shelf:
1. Check that the additional TPU/OCU has not been physically damaged
during shipment, and that the antistatic protection bag of the original
packaging is sealed.
2. Remove the shelf from its antistatic protection packaging and perform a
3. Record the hardware and software versions indicated on the shelf
4. Arrange all cables and fibers leading to the expanded XDM-100H so that
they will not be unintentionally disconnected when the additional
TPU/OCU is inserted on the rack.
5. Open the two screws securing the protective cover of the TPU/OCU
connector in place (located at the back right corner, on the top of the first
TPU/OCU shelf as shown in the figure below). Remove the cover.

Maintenance Manual
Figure B-19: Removing the connector cover and the fastening bracket from the
first TPU/OCU
6. Open the 10 screws securing the fastening bracket to the first TPU/OCU
shelf installed on the expanded XDM-100H (see the above figure for
reference).
7. Open the two screws fastening the bracket to the rack. Remove the bracket.
8. Assemble eight M2.5 x 6 screws on the first TPU/OCU shelf in the places
indicated in the figure below.
9. Assemble two M2.5 x 4 screws on the first TPU/OCU shelf in the places
indicated in the figure below.
Figure B-20: Assembling M2.5 x 6 and M2.5 x 4 screws

Installing the TPU/OCU XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
10. Remove the H-connector from its protective packaging and install it on the
first TPU/OCU shelf as shown in the figure below.
Figure B-21: Inserting the TPU/OCU connector on to the first TPU/OCU shelf

Maintenance Manual
11. Carefully lower the second TPU/OCU onto the expanded XDM-100H (on
the first TPU/OCU shelf), taking care that the pin guides are inserted into
the slots as illustrated in the following figure.
Figure B-22: Lowering the second TPU/OCU on to the expanded shelf
12. Insert the four supplied long screws into the appropriate holes, as illustrated
in the following figure, and secure the second TPU/OCU in place.
Figure B-23: Securing the second TPU/OCU on to the expanded shelf

C
C Connection Data
In This Appendix
Overview ....................................................................................C-2
MXC-100 DC Input Power Connectors .....................................C-3
ECU/ECU-F Card Connectors....................................................C-3
PIM2_21 Module Connection Data..........................................C-13
PIM2_63 Module Connection Data..........................................C-17
EISM Connectors .....................................................................C-21
xRAP Connectors .....................................................................C-21
xRAP-100 Connectors..............................................................C-27
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary C-1

Maintenance Manual
Overview
This appendix provides connection data for the user connectors located in the
XDM-100 shelf and associated ancillary equipment supplied by ECI Telecoms
Optical Networks Division, as follows:
MXC-100 DC Input Power Connectors (on page C-3)
ECU/ECU-F Card Connectors (on page C-3)
PIM2_21 Module Connection Data (on page C-13)
PIM2_63 Module Connection Data (on page C-17)
EISM Connectors (on page C-21)
xRAP Connectors (on page C-21)
xRAP-100 Connectors (on page C-27)
Any connectors not described in this Appendix are reserved for use by ECI
Telecoms Optical Networks Division technical support personnel and/or for
future expansion, and therefore no user equipment may be connected to them.
C-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and MXC-100 DC Input Power Connectors
Maintenance Manual
MXC-100 DC Input Power Connectors

The DC input power connectors, designated POWER IN A and POWER IN B,
are 3-pin D-type male connectors, located on the MXC-100 panel. The figure
below identifies the functions of the POWER IN connector pins, as seen when
looking into the connector.
Figure C-1: POWER IN input power connectors, pin functions
ECU/ECU-F Card Connectors
USB Connector
The USB connector is a 6-pin Type A USB connector that provides a serial
USB management interface. This interface is a future option and not used in the
current XDM-100 system.
The figure below identifies the connector pins, as seen when looking into the
connector. The table below lists the pin assignment for a typical connector.
Figure C-2: USB connector, pin identification

ECU/ECU-F Card Connectors XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Table C-1: USB connector, pin assignment
Pin Designation Function Direction

1 VCC_USB Bus DC voltage Output
2 DATN_USB Data, wire Output
3 DATP_USB Data, + wire Output
4 GND_USB Ground
5, 6 CGND Shield
ALARMS Connector
The ALARMS connector is a 36-pin SCSI female connector that carries three
groups of lines:
Five external alarm input lines referenced to an internal power supply
common line (the power supplys common line is floating relative to the
chassis ground). The alarm input lines are monitored by the XDM-100
management subsystem. Each input is connected to the input diode of an
optocoupler.
Three external alarm outputs/inputs. Each output is provided by three relay
dry contacts. These lines can be configured as additional alarm inputs by
the systems management.
Four severity alarm outputs and a buzzer control line. Each output is
provided by three relay dry contacts. The buzzer control line is provided by
two dry contacts.
Relay contact ratings are 75 V in open state, and 1 A in closed state.
connector. The table below lists the pin assignment for the ALARMS
connector.
Figure C-3: ALARMS connector, pin identification
The ALARMS connector can be connected in several configurations to the

customers alarm collecting facility. It can be connected directly to the
customers distribution frame or via xRAP or xRAP-100 rack alarm panels to
the customers facility. ECI Telecoms Optical Networks Division offers

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and ECU/ECU-F Card Connectors
Maintenance Manual
appropriate cables for each of the configurations. These cables are described in
the sections that follow.
Table C-2: ALARMS connector, pin assignment
Pin Designation Function Direction Pin Designation Function Direction
1 COMMON_F Floating power Input 19 CRIT_NC Critical alarm Output

supply common NC
2 ALM_IP1 Alarm input 1, Input 20 CRIT_NO Critical alarm Output
+ wire NO
3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, Input 21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm Output
wire common
4 ALM_IP2 Alarm input 2, Input 22 MAJ_NC Major alarm Output
+ wire NC
5 ALM_IN2 Alarm input 2, Input 23 MAJ_COM Major alarm Output
wire common
6 ALM_IP3 Alarm input 3, Input 24 MAJ_NO Major alarm Output
+ wire NO
7 ALM_IN3 Alarm input 3, Input 25 MIN_NC Minor alarm Output
wire NC
8 ALM_IP4 Alarm input 4, Input 26 MIN_NO Minor alarm Output
+ wire NO
9 ALM_IN4 Alarm input 4, Input 27 MIN_COM Minor alarm Output
wire common
10 ALM_IP5 Alarm input 5, Input 28 WARN_NC Warning alarm Output
+ wire NC
11 ALM_IN5 Alarm input 5, Input 29 WARN_COM Warning alarm Output
wire common
12 ALM_O1NO/ Alarm output 1 Output/ 30 WARN_NO Warning alarm Output
IN6 NO/input 6, Input NO
wire
13 ALM_O1/IP6 Alarm output 1 Output/ 31 ALM_O3NO/ Alarm output 3 Output /
common/input Input IN8 common/ Input
6, + wire input 8, wire
14 ALM_O1NC Alarm output 1 Output 32 ALM_O3/IP8 Alarm output 3 Output /
NC common/ Input
input 8, + wire
15 ALM_O2NO/ Alarm output 2 Output/ 33 ALM_O3NC Alarm output 3 Output
IN7 NO/input 7, Input NC
wire
16 ALM_O2/IP7 Alarm output 2 Output / 34 EXTA_SN2 External alarm Input
common/input Input sense 2
7, + wire
17 ALM_O2NC Alarm output 2 Output 35 BUZ_NO Audio alarm Input
NC activation line
18 BUZ_COM Buzzer Input 36 EXTA_SN1 External alarm Input
common sense 1

Maintenance Manual
NOTE: Alarm outputs of ALM_01NO/IN6, ALM_O1/IP6,

ALM_O2NO/IN7, ALM_O2/IP7, ALM_O3NO/IN8,
ALM_O3/IP8 can be configured as alarm inputs by the
system's management.
Alarms client cable

This cable provides a direct connection between the XDM-100 and the
customers distribution frame. The cable has a 36-pin SCSI male connector on
one end, which connects to the ALARMS connector, and open wires for
connecting to the customers facility on the other end. The table below lists the
pin assignment in the SCSI connector and the color of the wire connected to the
corresponding pin for the connection between the XDM-100 ALARMS
connector and a distribution frame.
Table C-3: ALARMS client cable wiring
Pin Name Function Direction Wire color

1 COMMON_F Floating power supply Input Brown
common
2 Not connected
3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, wire Input Brown/gray-ring
4 Not connected
5 ALM_IN2 Alarm input 2, wire Input Red
6 Not connected
7 ALM_IN3 Alarm input 3, wire Input Red/gray-ring
8 Not connected
9 ALM_IN4 Alarm input 4, wire Input Orange
10 Not connected
11 ALM_IN5 Alarm input 5, wire Input Orange/gray-ring
12 ALM_O1NO/ Alarm output 1 Output/Input Yellow
IN6 NO/input 6,
wire
13 ALM_O1/IP6 Alarm output 1 Output/ Yellow/gray-ring
common/input 6, + wire Input
14 ALM_O1NC Alarm output 1 NC Output Green
15 ALM_O2NO/ Alarm output 2 Output/ Green/gray-ring
IN7 NO/input 7, Input
wire
16 ALM_O2/IP7 Alarm output 2 Output/ Blue
common/input 7, + wire Input

Maintenance Manual

17 ALM_O2NC Alarm output 2 NC Output Blue/gray-ring
18 BUZ_COM Buzzer common Input Violet
19 CRIT_NC Critical alarm NC Input White
20 CRIT_NO Critical alarm NO Input White/gray-ring
21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm common Pink
22 MAJ_NC Major alarm NC Input Pink/gray-ring
23 MAJ_COM Major alarm common Input Brown/white-ring
24 MAJ_NO Major alarm NO Input Red/white-ring
25 MIN_NC Minor alarm NC Orange/white-ring
26 MIN_NO Minor alarm NO Input Yellow/white-ring
27 MIN_COM Minor alarm common Input Green/white-ring
28 WARN_NC Warning alarm NC Input Blue/white-ring
29 WARN_COM Warning alarm common Violet/white-ring
30 WARN_NO Warning alarm NO Light gray/
white-ring
31 ALM_O3NO/ Alarm output 3 Red/brown-ring
IN8 common/input 8,
wire
32 ALM_O3/IP8 Alarm output 3 Input Yellow/brown-ring
common/input 8, + wire
33 ALM_O3NC Alarm output 3 NC Input Orange/brown-ring
34 EXTA_SN2 External alarm sense 2 Input
35 BUZ_NO Audio alarm activation Input Violet/gray-ring
line
xRAP-100 alarms cable

This cable connects the XDM-100 to the xRAP-100. The cable has a 36-pin
SCSI male connector on both ends; one connects to the XDM-100 ALARMS
connector, and the other to the xRAP-100 alarms connector. The table below
lists the xRAP-100 alarms cable wiring.
Table C-4: xRAP-100 alarms cable wiring
XDM-100 side Name Function xRAP-100 side

SCSI connector SCSI connector
1 COMMON_F Floating power supply 1

common
2 ALM_IP1 Alarm input 1, + wire 2

Maintenance Manual

3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, wire 3

12 ALM_O1NO/IN6 Alarm output 1 12
NO/input 6 wire
13 ALM_O1/IP6 Alarm output 1 13
common/input 6, +
wire
14 ALM_O1NC Alarm output 1 NC 14
NO/input 7, wire
common/input 7, +
wire
18 BUZ_COM Buzzer common 18
19 CRIT_NC Critical alarm NC 19
20 CRIT_NO Critical alarm NO 20
21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm 21
common
22 MAJ_NC Major alarm NC 22
23 MAJ_COM Major alarm common 23
24 MAJ_NO Major alarm NO 24
25 MIN_NC Minor alarm NC 25
26 MIN_NO Minor alarm NO 26
27 MIN_COM Minor alarm common 27
28 WARN_NC Warning alarm NC 28
29 WARN_COM Warning alarm 29
common
30 WARN_NO Warning alarm NO 30

Maintenance Manual


common/input 8,
wire
common/input 8,
+ wire
34 EXTA_SN2 External alarm sense 2 34
35 BUZ_NO Audio alarm 35
activation line
36 EXTA_SN1 External alarm sense 1 36
xRAP alarms cable

This cable connects between the XDM-100 and the xRAP. The cable has a
36-pin SCSI male connector on one end, which connects to the XDM-100
ALARMS connector. The other end of the cable, which connects to the xRAP,
splits into two: one end terminates with a 9-pin D-type female connector, and
the other has a 25-pin D-type male connector. The 9-pin D-type connector
carries the severity alarms, and the 25-pin D-type connector carries the external
input/output alarms. The table below lists the xRAP alarms cable wiring.
Table C-5: xRAP alarms cable wiring
XDM-100 side SCSI Function xRAP side

connector
D-type 9-pin D-type 25-pin
connector connector
2 Alarm input 1 1
4 Alarm input 2 2
6 Alarm input 3 3
8 Alarm input 4 4
10 Alarm input 5 5
13 Alarm output 1/input 6 14
3, 31 Ground 10
5, 7, 9, 11, 12, 15 Ground 23
1, 14, 17, 19, 22, 25, Not connected 6, 7, 8 6-8, 9, 11-13,
28, 33, 34, 36 17-22, 24-36
21 Critical alarm common 1

Maintenance Manual
XDM-100 side SCSI Function xRAP side

connector
D-type 9-pin D-type 25-pin
connector connector
23 Major alarm common 2
27 Minor alarm common 3
29 Warning alarm common 4
18 Buzzer common 5
20, 24, 26, 30, 35 Common 9
F-CHANNEL Connector
The F-CHANNEL connector is a 9-pin D-type male connector that provides a
serial RS-232 communication channel supporting SLIP. This connector is
intended for connection to an eCraft service terminal. The connection is made
to one of the serial RS-232 ports of the PC serving as an eCraft terminal, using
a crossed cable.
connector. The table below lists the connector pin assignment, together with the
corresponding pin in the eCraft serial RS-232 port (assuming that this port uses
a 9-pin connector).
Figure C-4: F-CHANNEL connector, pin identification
Table C-6: F-CHANNEL connector, pin assignment
Pin Name Function Direction eCraft serial port pin

1 Not connected Not connected
2 COM-F-RX F-channel receive Input Pin 3 (transmit output)
3 COM-F-TX F-channel transmit Output Pin 2 (receive input)
4 Not connected Not connected
5 GND Ground Pin 5 (ground)
6, 7, Not connected Not connected
8, 9

Maintenance Manual
T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 Connectors

The T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors are 9-pin D-type male connectors,
each including two groups of lines:
Clock input (T3 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703 interface)
Clock output (T4 2.048 MHz signal, ITU-T Rec. G.703 interface)
The MAIN connector serves the main TMU, and the PROTECT connector
serves the standby (protection) TMU. They are connected to the site timing
reference distribution subsystem.
The figure below identifies the connector pins (as seen when looking into the
connector), and the table below lists their pin assignment.
Figure C-5: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors, pin identification
Table C-7: T3_1/T4_1 and T3_2/T4_2 connectors, pin assignment
Pin Name Function Direction

1 SHIELD Shield -
2 CK_2M_MIL Clock input, low Input
3 SHIELD Shield -
4 CK_2M_MOL Clock output, low Output
5 Not connected -
6 CK_2M_MIH Clock input, high Input
7 SHIELD Shield -
8 CK_2M_MOH Clock output, high Output
9 Not connected -

Maintenance Manual
ETHERNET Connectors
The two ETHERNET connectors located on the ECU-F panel, designated
MNG MAIN and MNG PROT, are 8-pin RJ-45 connectors that provide two
Ethernet 10BaseT management interfaces (one for each MXC-100 card
installed in the XDM-100 shelf).
NOTE: The MNG PROT connector is not included on the

ECU card (management protection is not supported).
At any time, only the interface connected to the MXC-100 card serving as the
current main card is active; the interface connected to the MXC-100 card
serving as the protection card is in standby, to provide protection for the out-of-
band management traffic.
Each ETHERNET connector is wired as a station port intended for direct
connection through a straight cable to a port of a 10BaseT Ethernet hub.
Figure C-6: ETHERNET connectors, pin identification
Table C-8: ETHERNET connectors, pin assignment
Designation Function Direction

TX+ Transmit, + wire Output
TX Transmit, wire Output
RX+ Receive, + wire Input
N/C Not connected
RX Receive, wire Input
FGND Frame ground
N/C Not connected

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and PIM2_21 Module Connection Data
Maintenance Manual
PIM2_21 Module Connection Data

The PIM2_21 modules provide 21 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary
interfaces and have two 50-pin SCSI female connectors. The upper connector
serves the E1 receive signals and the lower connector serves the E1 transmit
signals.
The figure below identifies the connector pins as seen when looking into the
connector.
The tables below list the pin assignment for a typical connector (for unbalanced
interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor, and wire B is the shield, or
ring). These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the corresponding
pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecoms Optical Networks Division for
connecting between the tributary connector and a distribution frame.
Figure C-7: PIM2_21 module E1 connectors pin identification
Table C-9: PIM2_21 module, receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment

1 RTIP1 Receive, tributary 1, wire A Input Brown
2 RTIP2 Receive, tributary 2, wire A Input Red
3 RTIP3 Receive, tributary 3, wire A Input Orange
4 RTIP4 Receive, tributary 4, wire A Input Yellow
5 RTIP5 Receive, tributary 5, wire A Input Green
6 RTIP6 Receive, tributary 6, wire A Input Blue
7 RTIP7 Receive, tributary 7, wire A Input Violet
8 GND Shield Brown/green-ring
9 RTIP8 Receive, tributary 8, wire A Input White
10 RTIP9 Receive, tributary 9, wire A Input Pink

PIM2_21 Module Connection Data XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual

11 RTIP10 Receive, tributary 10, wire A Input Brown/white-ring
12 RTIP11 Receive, tributary 11, wire A Input Orange/white-ring
13 RTIP12 Receive, tributary 12, wire A Input Green/white-ring
14 RTIP13 Receive, tributary 13, wire A Input Violet/white-ring
15 RTIP14 Receive, tributary 14, wire A Input Red/brown-ring
16 GND Shield Light-gray/green-
ring
17 RTIP15 Receive, tributary 15, wire A Input Orange/brown-
ring
18 RTIP16 Receive, tributary 16, wire A Input Blue/brown-ring
19 RTIP17 Receive, tributary 17, wire A Input Light-gray/brown-
ring
20 RTIP18 Receive, tributary 18, wire A Brown/red-ring
21 RTIP19 Receive, tributary 19, wire A Input Yellow/red-ring
22 RTIP20 Receive, tributary 20, wire A Input Blue/red-ring
23 RTIP21 Receive, tributary 21, wire A Input White/red-ring
24 GND Shield Yellow/green-ring
25 Not connected
26 GND Shield Orange/green-ring
27 RRING1 Receive, tributary 1, wire B Input Brown/gray-ring
28 RRING2 Receive, tributary 2, wire B Input Red/gray-ring
29 RRING3 Receive, tributary 3, wire B Input Orange/gray-ring
30 RRING4 Receive, tributary 4, wire B Input Yellow/gray-ring
31 RRING5 Receive, tributary 5, wire B Input Green/gray-ring
32 RRING6 Receive, tributary 6, wire B Input Blue/gray-ring
33 RRING7 Receive, tributary 7, wire B Input Violet/gray-ring
34 GND Shield Violet/green-ring
35 RRING8 Receive, tributary 8, wire B Input White/gray-ring
36 RRING9 Receive, tributary 9, wire B Input Pink/gray-ring
37 RRING10 Receive, tributary 10, wire B Input Red/white-ring
38 RRING11 Receive, tributary 11, wire B Input Yellow/white-ring
39 RRING12 Receive, tributary 12, wire B Input Blue/white-ring
40 RRING13 Receive, tributary 13, wire B Input Light-gray/white-
ring
41 RRING14 Receive, tributary 14, wire B Input Yellow/brown-
ring
42 GND Shield Blue/green-ring
43 RRING15 Receive, tributary 15, wire B Input Green/brown-ring

Maintenance Manual

44 RRING16 Receive, tributary 16, wire B Input Violet/brown-ring
45 RRING17 Receive, tributary 17, wire B Input Pink/brown-ring
46 RRING18 Receive, tributary 18, wire B Input Light-gray/red-
ring
47 RRING19 Receive, tributary 19, wire B Input Green/red-ring
48 RRING20 Receive, tributary 20, wire B Input Violet/red-ring
49 RRING21 Receive, tributary 21, wire B Input Pink/red-ring
50 GND Shield Pink/green-ring
Table C-10: PIM2_21 module, transmit lines (lower) connector pin assignment

1 TTIP1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire A Output Brown/yellow-
ring
2 TTIP2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire A Output Orange/yellow-
ring
3 TTIP3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire A Output Blue/yellow-ring
4 TTIP4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire A Output Light-
gray/yellow-ring
5 TTIP5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire A Output Brown/blue-ring
6 TTIP6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire A Output Orange/blue-ring
7 TTIP7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire A Output Green/blue-ring
8 GND Shield Pink/orange-ring
9 TTIP8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire A Output Light-gray/blue-
ring
10 TTIP9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire A Output Brown/orange-
ring
11 TTIP10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire A Output Yellow/orange-
ring
12 TTIP11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire A Output Blue/orange-ring
13 TTIP12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire A Output Light-gray/
orange-ring
14 TTIP13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire A Output Brown/violet-
ring
15 TTIP14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire A Output Orange/violet-
ring
16 GND Shield Pink/blue-ring
17 TTIP15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire A Output Green/violet-ring
18 TTIP16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire A Output Light-
gray/violet-ring
19 TTIP17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire A Output Brown/pink-ring

Maintenance Manual

20 TTIP18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire A Output Orange/pink-ring
21 TTIP19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire A Output Green/pink-ring
22 TTIP20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire A Output Light-gray/pink-
ring
23 TTIP21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire A Output Pink/violet-ring
24 GND Shield Pink/white-ring
25 Not connected
26 GND Shield White/brown-
ring
27 TRING1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire B Output Red/yellow-ring
28 TRING2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire B Output Green/yellow-
ring
29 TRING3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire B Output Violet/yellow-
ring
30 TRING4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire B Output White/yellow-
ring
31 TRING5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire B Output Red/blue-ring
32 TRING6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire B Output Yellow/blue-ring
33 TRING7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire B Output Violet/blue-ring
34 GND Shield Black
35 TRING8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire B Output White/blue-ring
36 TRING9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire B Output Red/orange-ring
37 TRING10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire B Output Green/orange-
ring
38 TRING11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire B Output Violet/orange-
ring
39 TRING12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire B Output White/orange-
ring
40 TRING13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire B Output Red/violet-ring
41 TRING14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire B Output Yellow/violet-
ring
42 GND Shield Black/white-ring
43 TRING15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire B Output Blue/violet-ring
44 TRING16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire B Output White/violet-ring
45 TRING17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire B Output Red/pink-ring
46 TRING18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire B Output Yellow/pink-ring
47 TRING19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire B Output Blue/pink-ring
48 TRING20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire B Output White/pink-ring
49 TRING21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire B Output Pink/yellow-ring

Maintenance Manual

50 GND Shield Black/yellow
PIM2_63 Module Connection Data

The PIM2_63 modules provide 63 balanced or unbalanced E1 tributary
interfaces and have three pairs of 50-pin SCSI female connectors. Each
connector pair supports 21 E1 interfaces. The upper connector in each pair
serves the E1 receive signals, and the lower the E1 transmit signals. The
tributaries and type of signal (IN for receive, OUT for transmit) supported by
each connector are marked near each connector: IN 1-21, OUT 1-21, IN 22-42,
OUT 22-42, IN 43-63, and OUT 43-63.
The figure below identifies the connector pins in each pair as seen when
looking into the connector.
The tables below list the pin assignment for a typical connector pair (for
unbalanced interfaces, wire A is the center (tip) conductor, and wire B is the
shield, or ring). These tables also list the color of the wire connected to the
corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI Telecoms Optical Networks
Division for connecting between the tributary connector and a distribution
frame. The tributary numbers appearing in these tables are given for the IN
1-21 and OUT 1-21 connectors. To obtain the correct tributary numbers for the
other connectors, interpret the numbers as representing the number of the
tributary in its group (for example in connectors IN 22-42 and OUT 22-42, 7
represents E1 tributary 28, in connectors IN 43-63 and OUT 43-63, 12
represents E1 tributary 57).
UPPER
Pin 1 Pin 25
Pin 26 Pin 50
Pin 1 Pin 25
Pin 26 Pin 50
LOWER
Figure C-8: PIM2_63 typical pair connectors, pin identification

Maintenance Manual
Table C-11: PIM2_63 module, receive lines (upper) connector pin assignment

1 RTIP1 Receive, tributary 1, wire A Input Brown
2 RTIP2 Receive, tributary 2, wire A Input Red
3 RTIP3 Receive, tributary 3, wire A Input Orange
4 RTIP4 Receive, tributary 4, wire A Input Yellow
5 RTIP5 Receive, tributary 5, wire A Input Green
6 RTIP6 Receive, tributary 6, wire A Input Blue
7 RTIP7 Receive, tributary 7, wire A Input Violet
8 GND Shield Brown/green-ring
9 RTIP8 Receive, tributary 8, wire A Input White
10 RTIP9 Receive, tributary 9, wire A Input Pink
11 RTIP10 Receive, tributary 10, wire A Input Brown/white-ring
12 RTIP11 Receive, tributary 11, wire A Input Orange/white-ring
13 RTIP12 Receive, tributary 12, wire A Input Green/white-ring
14 RTIP13 Receive, tributary 13, wire A Input Violet/white-ring
15 RTIP14 Receive, tributary 14, wire A Input Red/brown-ring
16 GND Shield Light-gray/green-
ring
17 RTIP15 Receive, tributary 15, wire A Input Orange/brown-
ring
18 RTIP16 Receive, tributary 16, wire A Input Blue/brown-ring
19 RTIP17 Receive, tributary 17, wire A Input Light-gray/
brown-ring
20 RTIP18 Receive, tributary 18, wire A Brown/red-ring
21 RTIP19 Receive, tributary 19, wire A Input Yellow/red-ring
22 RTIP20 Receive, tributary 20, wire A Input Blue/red-ring
23 RTIP21 Receive, tributary 21, wire A Input White/red-ring
24 GND Shield Yellow/green-ring
25 Not connected
26 GND Shield Orange/green-ring
27 RRING1 Receive, tributary 1, wire B Input Brown/gray-ring
28 RRING2 Receive, tributary 2, wire B Input Red/gray-ring
29 RRING3 Receive, tributary 3, wire B Input Orange/gray-ring
30 RRING4 Receive, tributary 4, wire B Input Yellow/gray-ring
31 RRING5 Receive, tributary 5, wire B Input Green/gray-ring
32 RRING6 Receive, tributary 6, wire B Input Blue/gray-ring
33 RRING7 Receive, tributary 7, wire B Input Violet/gray-ring

Maintenance Manual

34 GND Shield Violet/green-ring
35 RRING8 Receive, tributary 8, wire B Input White/gray-ring
36 RRING9 Receive, tributary 9, wire B Input Pink/gray-ring
37 RRING10 Receive, tributary 10, wire B Input Red/white-ring
38 RRING11 Receive, tributary 11, wire B Input Yellow/white-ring
39 RRING12 Receive, tributary 12, wire B Input Blue/white-ring
40 RRING13 Receive, tributary 13, wire B Input Light-gray/white-
ring
41 RRING14 Receive, tributary 14, wire B Input Yellow/brown-
ring
42 GND Shield Blue/green-ring
43 RRING15 Receive, tributary 15, wire B Input Green/brown-ring
44 RRING16 Receive, tributary 16, wire B Input Violet/brown-ring
45 RRING17 Receive, tributary 17, wire B Input Pink/brown-ring
46 RRING18 Receive, tributary 18, wire B Input Light-gray/
red-ring
47 RRING19 Receive, tributary 19, wire B Input Green/red-ring
48 RRING20 Receive, tributary 20, wire B Input Violet/red-ring
49 RRING21 Receive, tributary 21, wire B Input Pink/red-ring
50 GND Shield Pink/green-ring
Table C-12: PIM2_63 module, typical transmit lines (lower) connector pin
assignment

1 TTIP1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire A Output Brown/yellow-
ring
2 TTIP2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire A Output Orange/yellow-
ring
3 TTIP3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire A Output Blue/yellow-ring
yellow-ring
5 TTIP5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire A Output Brown/blue-ring
6 TTIP6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire A Output Orange/blue-ring
7 TTIP7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire A Output Green/blue-ring
8 GND Shield Pink/orange-ring
blue-ring
10 TTIP9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire A Output Brown/orange-
ring

Maintenance Manual

11 TTIP10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire A Output Yellow/orange-
ring
12 TTIP11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire A Output Blue/orange-ring
orange-ring
14 TTIP13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire A Output Brown/violet-ring
15 TTIP14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire A Output Orange/
violet-ring
16 GND Shield Pink/blue-ring
17 TTIP15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire A Output Green/violet-ring
violet-ring
19 TTIP17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire A Output Brown/pink-ring
20 TTIP18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire A Output Orange/pink-ring
21 TTIP19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire A Output Green/pink-ring
pink-ring
23 TTIP21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire A Output Pink/violet-ring
24 GND Shield Pink/white-ring
25 Not connected
26 GND Shield White/brown-ring
27 TRING1 Transmit, tributary 1, wire B Output Red/yellow-ring
28 TRING2 Transmit, tributary 2, wire B Output Green/yellow-ring
29 TRING3 Transmit, tributary 3, wire B Output Violet/yellow-ring
30 TRING4 Transmit, tributary 4, wire B Output White/yellow-ring
31 TRING5 Transmit, tributary 5, wire B Output Red/blue-ring
32 TRING6 Transmit, tributary 6, wire B Output Yellow/blue-ring
33 TRING7 Transmit, tributary 7, wire B Output Violet/blue-ring
34 GND Shield Black
35 TRING8 Transmit, tributary 8, wire B Output White/blue-ring
36 TRING9 Transmit, tributary 9, wire B Output Red/orange-ring
37 TRING10 Transmit, tributary 10, wire B Output Green/orange-ring
38 TRING11 Transmit, tributary 11, wire B Output Violet/orange-ring
39 TRING12 Transmit, tributary 12, wire B Output White/orange-ring
40 TRING13 Transmit, tributary 13, wire B Output Red/violet-ring
41 TRING14 Transmit, tributary 14, wire B Output Yellow/violet-ring
42 GND Shield Black/white-ring
43 TRING15 Transmit, tributary 15, wire B Output Blue/violet-ring

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and EISM Connectors
Maintenance Manual

44 TRING16 Transmit, tributary 16, wire B Output White/violet-ring
45 TRING17 Transmit, tributary 17, wire B Output Red/pink-ring
46 TRING18 Transmit, tributary 18, wire B Output Yellow/pink-ring
47 TRING19 Transmit, tributary 19, wire B Output Blue/pink-ring
48 TRING20 Transmit, tributary 20, wire B Output White/pink-ring
49 TRING21 Transmit, tributary 21, wire B Output Pink/yellow-ring
50 GND Shield Black/yellow
EISM Connectors
EISMs are Fast Ethernet modules that also provide electrical 10/100BaseT
ports with 8-pin RJ-45 connectors.
Figure C-9: 10/100BaseT connectors, pin identification
Table C-13: 10/100BaseT connectors, pin assignment

1 TD+ Transmit, + wire Output
2 TD Transmit, wire Output
3 RD+ Receive, + wire Input
6 RD Receive, wire Input
xRAP Connectors
SHELF EXTERNAL ALARM/CONTROL Connectors

The three SHELF EXTERNAL ALARM/CONTROL connectors are 25-pin D-
type female connectors. Each connector is intended for connection to the

xRAP Connectors XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
ALARMS connector of an XDM-100 shelf. Refer to ALARMS Connector (on

page C-4) for the ALARMS connector description. The figure below identifies
the connector pins (as seen when looking into the connector), and the table
below lists the pin assignment for this connector.
The connection between each SHELF EXTERNAL ALARM/CONTROL
connector and the corresponding ALARMS connector is performed by means
of a cable terminated in a 25-pin D-type male connector at the xRAP side, and
a 36-pin SCSI female connector at the XDM-100 shelf side. Cable wiring is
given in xRAP alarms cable wiring (on page C-9).
Figure C-10: SHELF EXTERNAL ALARM/CONTROL connector, pin identification
Table C-14: SHELF EXTERNAL ALARM/CONTROL connector, pin assignment

1 ALM_IP1 Connection to XDM alarm input 1 Output
9 Not connected
10 GND Ground
11-13 Not connected
14 ALM_OP1 Connection to XDM alarm output 1
15 ALM_OP2 Connection to XDM alarm output 2 Input
22 Not connected
23 GND Ground
24, 25 Not connected

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and xRAP Connectors
Maintenance Manual
RAP Connector
The RAP connector is a 9-pin D-type female connector that carries the shelf
severity alarm outputs, and a buzzer control line. All outputs are referenced to a
common line, which is floating relative to the chassis ground. The connector
connects to the XDM-100ALARMS connector.
connector. The table below lists the pin assignment for the RAP connector.
The connection between each RAP connector and the corresponding XDM-100
ALARMS connector is performed with an alarm cable. For cable wiring, see
xRAP alarms cable wiring (on page C-9).
Figure C-11: RAP connector, pin identification
Table C-15: RAP connector, pin assignment

1 Critical Critical alarm relay Input
2 Major Major alarm relay Input
3 Minor Minor alarm relay Input
4 Warning Warning relay Input
5 Buzzer Audio alarm activation line Input
6-8 Not connected
9 Common Common reference for all the outputs

Maintenance Manual
CONTROL CONNECTION Connector

The CONTROL CONNECTION connector is a 50-pin D-type female
connector, which carries three groups of lines:
Eight external alarm inputs, connected through optocouplers included in the
xRAP to the ALARM inputs of the XDM-100 shelf. Each input is
connected to the input diode of an optocoupler, referenced to the shelf
ground.
Eight sets of change-over relay contacts, floating with respect to shelf
ground, that serve as rack (bay) status outputs. Internal xRAP switches can
be used to assign each of the eight relays to one of the output alarm lines of
any XDM-100 shelf connected to the xRAP.
Four sets of change-over relay contacts, floating with respect to shelf
ground, that serve as rack (bay) alarm indication lines. The relays,
identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are activated by the
corresponding alarm relays of XDM-100 shelves.
The figure below identifies the CONTROL CONNECTION connector pins, as
seen when looking into the connector. The table below lists the pin assignment
for the CONTROL CONNECTION connector. This table also lists the color of
the wire connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by ECI
Telecoms Optical Networks Division for connecting between the CONTROL
CONNECTION connector and a distribution frame.
Figure C-12: CONTROL CONNECTION connector, pin identification
Table C-16: xRAP CONTROL CONNECTION connector, pin assignment
Pin Designation Function Direction Wire color

1 ALARM_IN1 External alarm input 1 Input Brown
2 ALARM_IN4 External alarm input 4 Input Brown/gray-
ring
3 ALARM_IN7 External alarm input 7 Input Red
4 Not used Red/gray-ring
5 OUT1_COM Output relay 1, common contact Output Orange
6 OUT2_COM Output relay 2, common contact Output Orange/gray-
ring
7 OUT3_COM Output relay 3, common contact Output Yellow
8 OUT4_COM Output relay 4, common contact Output Yellow/gray-
ring

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and xRAP Connectors
Maintenance Manual

9 OUT5_COM Output relay 5, common contact Output Green
10 OUT6_COM Output relay 6, common contact Output Green/gray-
ring
11 OUT7_COM Output relay 7, common contact Output Blue
12 OUT8_COM Output relay 8, common contact Output Blue/gray-ring
13 Not used Violet
14 CRIT_COM Critical alarm relay, common contact Output Violet/gray-
ring
15 MAJOR_COM Major alarm relay, common contact Output White
16 MINOR_COM Minor alarm relay, common contact Output White/gray-
ring
17 WARN_COM Warning relay, common contact Output Pink
18 ALARM_IN2 External alarm input 2 Input Pink/gray-ring
19 ALARM_IN5 External alarm input 5 Input Brown/white-
ring
20 ALARM_IN8 External alarm input 8 Input Red/white-ring
21 Not used Orange/white-
ring
22 OUT1NO Output relay 1, normally open contact Output Yellow/white-
ring
23 OUT2NO Output relay 2, normally open contact Output Green/white-
ring
24 OUT3NO Output relay 3, normally open contact Output Blue/white-ring
25 OUT4NO Output relay 4, normally open contact Output Violet/white-
ring
26 OUT5NO Output relay 5, normally open contact Output Light-gray/
white-ring
27 OUT6NO Output relay 6, normally open contact Output Red/brown-ring
28 OUT7NO Output relay 7, normally open contact Output Yellow/brown-
ring
29 OUT8NO Output relay 8, normally open contact Output Orange/brown-
ring
30 CRIT_NC Critical alarm relay, normally closed Output Green/brown-
contact ring
31 MAJOR_NC Major alarm relay, normally closed Output Blue/brown-
contact ring
32 MINOR_NC Minor alarm relay, normally closed Output Violet/brown-
contact ring
33 WARN_NC Warning relay, normally closed contact Output Light-gray/
brown-ring
34 ALARM_IN3 External alarm input 3 Input Pink/brown-
ring
35 ALARM_IN6 External alarm input 6 Input Brown/red-ring
36 GNDPS Ground Light-gray/red-
ring

Maintenance Manual

37 Not used Yellow/red-
ring
38 OUT1NC Output relay 1, normally closed contact Output Green/red-ring
39 OUT2NC Output relay 2, normally closed contact Output Blue/red-ring
40 OUT3NC Output relay 3, normally closed contact Output Violet/red-ring
41 OUT4NC Output relay 4, normally closed contact Output White/red-ring
42 OUT5NC Output relay 5, normally closed contact Output Pink/red-ring
43 OUT6NC Output relay 6, normally closed contact Output Brown/green-
ring
44 OUT7NC Output relay 7, normally closed contact Output Light-gray/
green-ring
45 OUT8NC Output relay 8, normally closed contact Output Yellow/green-
ring
46 Not used Orange/green-
ring
47 CRIT_NO Critical alarm relay, normally open Output Violet/green-
contact ring
48 MAJOR_NO Major alarm relay, normally open Output Blue/green-ring
contact
49 MINOR_NO Minor alarm relay, normally open Output Brown/blue-
contact ring
50 WARN_NO Warning relay, normally open contact Output Red/blue-ring

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and xRAP-100 Connectors
Maintenance Manual
xRAP-100 Connectors
Shelf DC Input Power Connectors

The shelf DC input power connectors, designated Shelf 1, Shelf 2, Shelf 3, and
Shelf 4, are 3-pin, D-type male connectors. The Shelf 4 connector lines are also
connected to a 5-pin D-type connector for connecting to an XDM-1000 or
XDM-2000 shelf. The figure below identifies the functions of the shelf DC
input connectors pins, as seen when looking into the connector.
Figure C-13: xRAP-100 shelf DC input power connectors, pin functions
SHELF Alarm Connectors

The four SHELF alarm connectors are 36-pin SCSI female connectors. Each
connector is connected to the ALARMS connector of an XDM-100 shelf. Refer
to ALARMS Connector (on page C-4) for ALARMS connector description.
The figure below identifies the connector pins (as seen when looking into the
connector), and the table below lists the pin assignment for this connector.
Figure C-14: SHELF alarm connectors, pin identification
Table C-17: SHELF alarm connectors, pin assignment

1 COMMON_F Floating power supply common Input
2 ALM_IP1 Alarm input 1, + wire Input

xRAP-100 Connectors XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual

3 ALM_IN1 Alarm input 1, wire Input
12 ALM_O1NO/IN6 Alarm output 1 NO/input 6, wire Output/Input
13 ALM_O1/IP6 Alarm output 1 common/input 6, + wire Output/Input
14 ALM_O1NC Alarm output 1 NC Output
15 ALM_O2NO/IN7 Alarm output 2 NO/input 7, wire Output/Input
16 ALM_O2/IP7 Alarm output 2 common/input 7, + wire Output/Input
17 ALM_O2NC Alarm output 2 NC Output
18 BUZ_COM Buzzer common Input
19 CRIT_NC Critical alarm NC Input
20 CRIT_NO Critical alarm NO Input
21 CRIT_COM Critical alarm common
22 MAJ_NC Major alarm NC Input
23 MAJ_COM Major alarm common Input
24 MAJ_NO Major alarm NO Input
25 MIN_NC Minor alarm NC
26 MIN_NO Minor alarm NO Input
27 MIN_COM Minor alarm common Input
28 WARN_NC Warning alarm NC Input
29 WARN_COM Warning alarm common
30 WARN_NO Warning alarm NO
31 ALM_O3NO/IN8 Alarm output 3 common/input 8, wire
32 ALM_O3/IP8 Alarm output 3 common/input 8, + wire Input
33 ALM_O3NC Alarm output 3 NC Input
35 BUZ_NO Audio alarm activation line Input

Maintenance Manual
ALARM IN/OUT Connector

The ALARM IN/OUT connector is a SCSI 68-pin female connector, which
carries three groups of lines:
Sixteen external alarm inputs connected to the ALARM inputs of the
XDM-100 shelf. Four inputs are allocated to each XDM-100 shelf. Each
input is activated by closing a dry contact provided from the customers
facility.
Eight sets of change-over relay contacts, floating with respect to shelf
ground, that serve as rack (bay) status outputs. Each couple of the 8 relays
is assigned to one of the output alarm lines of the four XDM-100 shelves
connected to the xRAP-100.
Four sets of change-over relay contacts, floating with respect to shelf
ground, that serve as rack (bay) alarm indication lines. The relays,
identified as critical, major, minor, and warning, are activated by the
corresponding alarm relays of XDM-100 shelves.
The figure below identifies the ALARM IN/OUT connector pins, as seen when
looking into the connector. The table below lists the pin assignment for the
ALARM IN/OUT connector. This table also lists the color of the wire
connected to the corresponding pin in the cables offered by XDM-100s
Optical Networks Division for connecting between the ALARM IN/OUT
connector and a distribution frame.
Figure C-15: ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin identification
Table C-18: ALARM IN/OUT connector, pin assignment
Pin Designation Function Direction Wire color Assignment

1 ALM_01NO Output relay 1, normally Output Black
Shelf 1
open contact
2 ALM_01 Output relay 1, common Output Brown
contact
3 ALM_01NC Output relay 1, normally Output Red
closed contact
4 ALM_02NO Output relay 2, normally Output Orange
open contact
5 ALM_02 Output relay 2, common Output Yellow
contact

Maintenance Manual

6 ALM_02NC Output relay 2, normally Output Green
closed contact
7 ALM_03NO Output relay 3, normally Output Blue
open contact
8 ALM_03 Output relay 3, common Output Violet
contact
9 ALM_03NC Output relay 3, normally Output Gray
closed contact
Shelf 2
10 ALM_04NO Output relay 4, normally Output White
open contact
11 ALM_04 Output relay 4, common Output Pink
contact
12 ALM_04NC Output relay 4, normally Output Light green
closed contact
13 ALM_05NO Output relay 5, normally Output Black/white
open contact
14 ALM_05 Output relay 5, common Output Brown/
contact white
15 ALM_05NC Output relay 5, normally Output Red/white
closed contact
Shelf 3
16 ALM_06NO Output relay 6, normally Output Orange/
open contact white
17 ALM_06 Output relay 6, common Output Green/
contact white
18 ALM_06NC Output relay 6, normally Output Blue/white
closed contact
19 ALM_07NO Output relay 7, normally Output Violet/
open contact white
20 ALM_07 Output relay 7, common Output Red/black
contact
21 ALM_07NC Output relay 7, normally Output Orange/
closed contact black
Shelf 4
22 ALM_08NO Output relay 8, normally Output Yellow/
open contact black
23 ALM_08 Output relay 8, common Output Green/
contact black
24 ALM_08NC Output relay 8, normally Output Gray/black
closed contact
25 CRIT_NC Critical alarm relay, Output Pink/black
All shelves
normally closed contact
26 CRIT_NO Critical alarm relay, Output Pink/green
normally open contact
27 CRIT_COM Critical alarm relay, Output Pink/red
common contact
28 MAJ_NC Major alarm relay, Output Pink/violet

Maintenance Manual

29 MAJ_NO Major alarm relay, Output Light blue
normally open contact
30 MAJ_COM Major alarm relay, Output Light
common contact blue/brown
31 MIN_NC Minor alarm relay, Output Light
normally closed contact blue/red
32 MIN_NO Minor alarm relay, Output Light
normally open contact blue/violet
33 MIN_COM Minor alarm relay, Output Light
common contact blue/black
34 WARN_COM Warning alarm relay, Output Gray/green
common contact
35 ALMIN1 External alarm input 1 Input Gray/red
36 ALM_IN1 External alarm input 1 Input Gray/violet
37 ALMIN2 External alarm input 2 Input Light
green/black
38 ALM_IN2 External alarm input 2 Input Violet/black
39 ALMIN3 External alarm input 3 Input Black/white Shelf 1
dots
40 ALM_IN3 External alarm input 3 Input Brown/
white dots
41 ALMIN4 External alarm input 4 Input Red/white
dots
42 ALM_IN4 External alarm input 4 Input Orange/
white dots
43 ALMIN5 External alarm input 5 Input Green/
white dots
44 ALM_IN5 External alarm input 5 Input Blue/white
dots
45 ALMIN6 External alarm input 6 Input Violet/
white dots
46 ALM_IN6 External alarm input 6 Input White/
black dots
Shelf 2
47 ALMIN7 External alarm input 7 Input Yellow/
black dots
48 ALM_IN7 External alarm input 7 Input Green/
black dots
49 ALMIN8 External alarm input 8 Input Light blue/
black dots
50 ALM_IN8 External alarm input 8 Input Pink/black
dots
51 ALMIN9 External alarm input 9 Input Red/black
Shelf 3
dots
52 ALM_IN9 External alarm input 9 Input Orange/
black dots

Maintenance Manual

53 ALMIN10 External alarm input 10 Input Violet/black
dots
54 ALM_IN10 External alarm input 10 Input Gray/black
dots
55 ALMIN11 External alarm input 11 Input Orange/red
dots
56 ALM_IN11 External alarm input 11 Input Yellow/red
dots
57 ALMIN12 External alarm input 12 Input Green/red
dots
58 ALM_IN12 External alarm input 12 Input Blue/red
dots
59 ALMIN13 External alarm input 13 Input Violet/red
dots
60 ALM_IN13 External alarm input 13 Input Gray/red
dots
61 ALMIN14 External alarm input 14 Input White/red
dots
62 ALM_IN14 External alarm input 14 Input Pink/red dots Shelf 4
63 ALMIN15 External alarm input 15 Input Yellow/
white
64 ALM_IN15 External alarm input 15 Input Gray/white
65 ALMIN16 External alarm input 16 Input Pink/white
66 ALM_IN16 External alarm input 16 Input Brown/
black
67 WARN_NC Warning alarm relay, Output Blue/black
All shelves
68 WARN_NO Warning alarm relay, Output Gray/white
normally open contact dots

D
D Rack Installation
In This Appendix
Installing XDM-100 Equipment Racks ......................................D-1
European 19 Rack Installation ..................................................D-7
Installing XDM-100 Equipment Racks
NOTE: The instructions in this Appendix are relevant to the

installation of all rack types. However, it is recommended
that XDM-100 shelves be installed on ETSI A racks.
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary D-1

Installing XDM-100 Equipment Racks XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Rack Floor Marking

You need to mark out the rack floor plan before installing it.
Before You Start:

Before starting, find the prescribed location of each equipment rack.
If you did not yet unpack the rack and the associated mounting kits, do it now
(see unpacking instructions in Unpacking and Visual Inspection on page 3-7).
To mark out the rack floor plan:

1. For each rack, mark out the floor at the rack location(s) according to the
floor plan template corresponding to the type of rack being installed:
ETSI A and ETSI B racks: use template of diagram a of Mounting
diagrams for ETSI racks (on page D-4).
23" rack: use template of diagram a of Mounting diagrams for 19"
and 23" racks (on page D-5).
19" rack: use template of diagram b of Mounting diagrams for 19"
and 23" racks (on page D-5).
The marked locations are a helpful guide for positioning the racks.
2. If the installation is located at a site with a floating (suspended) floor, also

mark out all cable entry slots.
3. For concrete or wooden floors, mark out all the points designated for
equipment bolting.
Rack Installation on Concrete Floors
To mount the rack on a concrete floor:

1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate
template (diagram a of Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks (on page D-4),
diagram a of Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks (on page D-5), or
diagram b of Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks (on page D-5)).
2. Insert expansion shields into the holes.
3. Position the rack over the mounting holes.
4. Secure the rack to the floor with the bolts supplied in the mounting kit, in
accordance with diagram b of Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks (on page
D-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Installing XDM-100 Equipment Racks
Maintenance Manual
D-4), or diagram c of Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks (on page
D-5).

Maintenance Manual
Rack Installation on Wooden Floors
To mount the rack on a wooden floor:

1. Drill the required mounting holes in accordance with the appropriate
template (see figures below), using a 5 mm drill bit.
3. Secure the rack to the floor using the appropriate wood screws (see figure
below).
Figure D-1: Mounting diagrams for ETSI racks

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Installing XDM-100 Equipment Racks
Maintenance Manual
12 mm - 4 places 12 mm - 4 places
1-45/64 1-45/64
6-1/2 9-29/32 6-1/2 9-29/32
18-1/2 14-1/2
3-11/16 3-11/16
25-7/8 21-7/8
a. 23 wide bay mounting hole drilling template b. 19 wide bay mounting hole drilling template
SCREW M12X50
FLAT WASHER
SPACER
M12 EXPANSION SHIELD
SQUARE WASHER
ANCHOR BRACKET
UNEQUAL FLANGE RACK
OPEN DUCT
4 STAGE FLOOR LEVEL
c. Bolting diagram concrete floor
Figure D-2: Mounting diagrams for 19" and 23" racks

Maintenance Manual
Rack Installation on Floating (Suspended)

Floors
To mount the rack on a floating (suspended) floor:

1. Drill the required mounting holes in the suspended floor, in accordance
with the appropriate template.
3. Secure the rack to the floor in accordance with diagram c of Mounting
diagrams for ETSI racks (on page D-4).
Suspended Overhead Tray Assembly
To mount the rack on a suspended overhead tray:

1. Refer to the suspended overhead tray diagram ( see figure below) and
position the overhead rack securing brackets.
2. Secure the rack to the overhead cabling trays, using the adjustable brackets.
2200 mm high racks may also be attached to the ceiling; 2600 mm racks
are generally attached only to the ceiling.
NUT M8
LOCK WASHER UPPER BRACKET 550
LOCK WASHER
FLAT WASHER CEILING
CEILING SCREW M8X20
FLAT WASHER
640 MAX
50 MIN
NUT M8
FLAT WASHER
SCREW M8X20
Installing Extendable Rails

In high-density installations, it may be necessary to install the xRAP above the
rack, using the extendable installation rails available from ECI Telecom.
In this case, attach the extendable installation rails to the top of the rack before
starting equipment installation.

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and European 19 Rack Installation
Maintenance Manual
Rack Grounding
Immediately after installing the rack, connect its grounding stud to the
prescribed grounding point on the site grounding bar. Use a grounding lead that
meets the grounding requirements listed in Before You Start (on page 2-1).
European 19 Rack Installation

The XDM-100 can also be installed in European 19 racks. This is accepted
under the limitations that the rack's general dimensions are according to the
following figure. Any other European 19 rack must be first examined and
approved by ECI Telecoms Optical Networks Division Mechanical
Department.
Front view Side view Rear view Top view
597 597 597 597

512
605.5
667
600
500
Maximum distance
between levels
2021
1912
499mm
625
515
44
Z 538
Mounting angle
355
Foremost position
Detail Z
44
500
515
538
Figure D-3: Example of an approved European 19 rack

European 19 Rack Installation XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual

E
E Frequencies and
Wavelengths
In This Appendix
Table of Frequencies and Wavelengths...................................... E-1
Table of Frequencies and Wavelengths

This appendix lists the ITU-T Rec. G.692 nominal frequencies and
wavelengths of the channels in the C band.
Table E-1: ITU-T Rec. G.692 channel frequencies and wavelengths
200 GHz Channel

Subband Channel Channel 100 GHz Channel Spacing
ITU-T Spacing
center center
Channel
freq. wave-length
Number
(THz) (nm) 8-ch. 16-ch. 16- ch. 32-ch. 40-ch.
Blue Red
system system system system system
21 192.1 1560.61
22 192.2 1559.79
23 192.3 1558.98
24 192.4 1558.17
25 192.5 1557.36
26 192.6 1556.55
27 192.7 1555.75
28 192.8 1554.94
29 192.9 1554.13
30 193.0 1553.33
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary E-1

Table of Frequencies and XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Wavelengths Maintenance Manual
200 GHz Channel

Subband Channel Channel 100 GHz Channel Spacing
ITU-T Spacing
center center
Channel
freq. wave-length
Number
(THz) (nm) 8-ch. 16-ch. 16- ch. 32-ch. 40-ch.
Blue Red
system system system system system
31 193.1 1552.52
32 193.2 1551.72
33 193.3 1550.92
34 193.4 1550.12
35 193.5 1549.32
36 193.6 1548.51
37 193.7 1547.72
38 193.8 1546.92
39 193.9 1546.12
40 194.0 1545.32
41 194.1 1544.53
42 194.2 1543.73
43 194.3 1542.94
44 194.4 1542.14
45 194.5 1541.35
46 194.6 1540.56
47 194.7 1539.77
48 194.8 1538.98
49 194.9 1538.19
50 195.0 1537.40
51 195.1 1536.61
52 195.2 1535.82
53 195.3 1535.04
54 195.4 1534.25
55 195.5 1533.47
56 195.6 1532.68
57 195.7 1531.90
58 195.8 1531.12
59 195.9 1530.33
60 196.0 1529.55
E-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

6 Index
A frame loss rate 4-18
input sensitivity 4-23
Aggregate Module Description
installed cards and modules 4-4
mixed modules A-21
LOS detection 4-23
overview A-15
maintenance action handling 4-25
SAM1_4/OE A-21
normal LED indications 4-4
SAM16_1 A-20
optical level measurement 4-6
SAM4_2 A-19
optical network 4-20
Ancillary Units
optical network test setup and
FST description A-48 required test equipment 4-21
ODF description A-50 optical power measurement 4-22
xDDF-21 description A-49 path protection 4-24
xRAP description A-43 SDH 4-7
xRAP100 description A-41 shelf power-up 4-7
C site 4-3
stability 4-19
Cable Guiding, Accessories A-46
system recovery and reset 4-19
Cables
throughput and latency 4-17
supplied with XDM100 shelf A-53
visual inspection and mechanical
Cisco ATA 186/Cisco2600/CallManager
checks 4-4
Test 4-16
Concrete Floors, Rack Installation D-2
Commissioning Tests
alarm handling 4-20 D
BER and stability 4-26 Data Network Commissioning Tests
data network 4-16 4-16
equipment 4-3 E
equipment power up 4-22
ECU Card
417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary I-1

Index XDM-100 Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Manual
description A-8 I
front panel A-8 I/O Module Description
functions A-8 EISM_208 A-31
overview A-5 EISM_226 A-33
EISM EISM_244 A-32
EISM_208 A-31 overview A-22
EISM_226 A-33 overview of EISM A-30
EISM_244 A-32 overview of electrical A-23
overview A-30 overview of optical A-27
Electrical I/O Module PIM2_21 A-23
overview A-23 PIM345_3 A-25
PIM2_21 A-23 SIM1_4/E A-26
PIM345_3 A-25 SIM1_4/O A-27
SIM1_4/E A-26 SIM1_4/OE A-29
Electrical SAM Module Description SIM4_2 A-28
SAM1_4/E A-16 IOP Hardware Protection Test 4-13
Equipment Installation
M
XDM-100H B-22
Ethernet Modules See EISM Module Main Cross-Connect and Control See
Description A-30 MXC A-10
Extendable Rails, Rack Installation D-6 Maintenance
External Connection Unit See ECU Card action handling test 4-15
A-5 monitoring system 5-6
F on-site troubleshooting 5-13
preventive 5-2
Fan Control UnitSee FCU Card A-2
replacing cards and modules 5-22
FCU Card
replacing I/O and aggregate modules
description A-2 5-28
general view A-2 replacing SFP transceivers in optical
Floating (Suspended) Floors, Rack interfaces 5-29
Installation D-6 replacing the FCU 5-30
Floor Marking, Rack Installation D-2 replacing xRAP/xRAP-100
FST components 5-30
description A-48 required equipment, tools and
materials 5-1
G
Mixed Aggregate Module Description
Grounding SAM1_4/OE A-21
rack installation D-7 Mixed I/O Module Description
I-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Index
Maintenance Manual
SIM1_4/OE A-29 aggregate modules A-15

Module Description description A-10
aggregate overview A-15 front panel A-10
EISM_208 A-31 functions A-10
EISM_226 A-33 options A-10
EISM_244 A-32 redundant option A-12
electrical SAM A-16 SAM modules A-15
mixed aggregate A-21 MXC-100 Card
optical SAM A-17 non-redundant option A-10
overview A-22 redundant option A-10
overview of EISM A-30 O
overview of electrical A-23
ODF Description A-50
overview of optical A-27
On-Site Troubleshooting 5-13
PIM2_21 A-23
power problems 5-14
PIM345_3 A-25
procedures for cards/modules 5-15
SAM1_4/E A-16
procedures for EISM modules 5-15
SAM1_4/O A-18
procedures for electrical interface
SAM1_4/OE A-21 modules 5-15
SAM16_1 A-20 procedures for optical OADM and
SAM4_2 A-19 mux/demux 5-15
SIM1_4/E A-26 procedures for optical transceiver
SIM1_4/O A-27 plug-ins 5-15
SIM1_4/OE A-29 using component indicators 5-15
SIM4_2 A-28 Optical Aggregate Module Description
TPM2_3 A-38 SAM16_1 A-20
TPMH_1 A-39 SAM4_2 A-19
Monitoring System 5-7 Optical Fiber StorageSee FST
Description A-48
assigning modules to slots 5-10
Optical I/O Module
channel selection 5-9
overview A-27
module selection 5-8
SIM1_4/O A-27
modules traffic monitoring 5-12
SIM4_2 A-28
options 5-10
Optical Patch Panel A-52
response to events 5-9
Optical SAM Modules
signal level monitoring 5-11
description A-17
stabilization time 5-9
Overhead Tray Assembly, Rack
MXC Redundancy Test 4-15
Installation D-6
MXC100 Card

Maintenance Manual
P SAM4_2 Aggregate Module A-19

PIM2_21 I/O Module A-23 SAM4_2 Module A-19
PIM2_21 Module A-23 SDH Commissioning Tests 4-7
PIM345_3 I/O Module A-25 2 Mbps 4-7
PIM345_3 Module A-25 34 Mbps 4-7
Preventive Maintenance 5-2 45 Mbps 4-8
Protection See TPU Shelf Description equipment power up 4-10
A-35 input sensitivity 4-10
LOS detection 4-9
R
MSP 1+1/linear APS 1+1 4-12
Rack Alarm Panel A-43
MS-SPRing 4-12
Rack Installation
network timing synchronization 4-9
concrete floors D-2
path protection and non-retrieval 4-
extendable rails D-6 11
floating (suspended) floors D-6 SDH 4-8
floor marking D-2 test equipment setup 4-7
grouding D-7 traffic stability 4-11
overview D-1 Severity Assignment Test 4-14
suspended overhead tray assembly SIM 1_4/O I/O Module A-27
D-6
SIM1_4/E I/O Module A-26
wooden floors D-4
SIM1_4/E Module A-26
Rack Installation, Accessories A-40
SIM1_4/O Module A-27
Replacing Cards and Modules 5-22
SIM1_4/OE I/O Module A-29
S SIM1_4/OE Module A-29
SAM Module Description SIM4_2 I/O Module A-28
electrical modules A-16 SIM4_2 Module A-28
optical modules A-17 Site Commissioning Tests 4-3
SAM1_4/E A-16 T
SAM1_4/O A-18
TC Module Description A-36
SAM1_4/E Aggregate Module A-16
Tests
SAM1_4/E Module A-16
Cisco ATA
SAM1_4/O Aggregate Module A-18 186/Cisco2600/CallManager 4-
SAM1_4/O Module A-18 16
SAM1_4/OE Aggregate Module A-21 commissioning 4-3
SAM1_4/OE Module A-21 data network commissioning 4-16
SAM16_1 Aggregate Module A-20 IOP hardware protection 4-13
SAM16_1 Module A-20 maintenance action handling 4-15

XDM-100 Installation, Operation and Index
Maintenance Manual
MXC redundancy 4-15 using component indicators 5-15

optical network commissioning 4-20 Typical 24-channel ODF Unit A-50
SDH 4-7 W
severity assignment 4-14
Wooden Floors, Rack Installation D-4
transmission alarm handling 4-14
TPM Module Description A-37 X
TPM2_3 A-38 xDDF-21
TPMH_1 A-39 description A-49
TPM2_3 Module A-38 patch panel for unbalanced E1
TPM2_3 Protection Module A-38 interfaces A-49
TPMH_1 Module A-39 XDM Platform Concept 1-2
TPMH_1 Protection Module A-39 XDM100
TPU Installed on XDM-100 Shelf A-35 shelf
TPU Shelf Description supplied cables A-53
overview A-35 XDM-100
TC module A-36 overview 1-3
TPM module A-37 platform options 1-4
Transmission Alarm Handling Test 4-14 shelf
Tributary ControlSee TC Module basic A-2
Description A-36 cable guide A-46
Tributary Protection Module See TPM fiber guide for ECI Telecoms
Module Description A-37 ETSI racks A-47
Tributary Protection UnitSee TPU Shelf fiber guide for standard ETSI
Description A-35 racks A-48
Troubleshooting fiber storage tray A-48
management communication 5-20 overview A-2
on-site 5-13 using cable guiding rods A-47
power problems 5-14 XDM-100 Shelf with TPU A-35
procedures for cards/modules 5-15 XDM-100H
procedures for EISM modules 5-15 description B-3
procedures for electrical interface I/O modules
modules 5-15
CWDM B-8
procedures for optical OADM and
EISM B-8
mux/demux 5-15
PDH B-8
procedures for optical transceiver
plug-ins 5-15 installation
timing subsystem 5-18 adding TPU/OCU B-22
transmission and traffic alarms 5-19 modules

Maintenance Manual
CWDM optical networking

B-12
mux/demux B-14
OADM B-18
splitter/coupler B-20
TC B-13
overview B-1
TPU/OCU shelf B-12
xRAP
connectors A-43
front panel A-43
overview A-43
xRAP100
front panel component functions
A-41
overview A-41
xRAP-100
connectors A-41

XDM-100 IOM SDH A00 4-5 en

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

XDM-100 IOM SDH A00 4-5 en

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

XDM-100

Installation, Operation and

Printed on 21 December, 2004

Copyright by ECI Telecom, 2003-2004. All rights reserved worldwide.

2 Before You Start ...................................................................... 2-1

3 Equipment Installation ............................................................ 3-1

417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary i

4 Commissioning Tests ............................................................. 4-1

A Equipment Description .......................................................... A-1

ii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

C Connection Data ..................................................................... C-1

D Rack Installation ..................................................................... D-1

E Frequencies and Wavelengths ...............................................E-1

6 Index .......................................................................................... I-1

417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary iii

iv ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary v

Figure 3-27: Installed air filter....................................................................................... 3-45

vi ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

Figure A-4: ECU-F front panel .......................................................................................A-6

417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary vii

Figure A-39: xDDF-21 patch panel for unbalanced E1 interfaces ...............................A-48

viii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

Figure C-7: PIM2_21 module E1 connectors pin identification................................... C-13

417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary ix

x ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xi

Table A-1: FCU front panel LED indicators....................................................................A-3

xii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

Table B-5: CTRP25_2C front panel LED indicators ......................................................B-9

417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xiii

xiv ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xv

NOTE: Text set off in this manner presents clarifying

CAUTION: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

WARNING: Text set off in this manner indicates that failure

xvi ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

Obtaining Technical Assistance

417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary xvii

Your Opinion Is Very Important To Us

What features did you like most about this manual?

xviii ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-1

The XDM-100 Concept

1-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

XDM-100 Platform Overview

Figure 1-1: XDM-100 shelf

417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-3

XDM-100 Platform Options

1-4 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

NOTE: It is recommended that the XDM-100 shelf be

417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 1-5

1-6 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

Outline of Installation Procedure

Table 2-1: Sequence of equipment installation

No. Task Reference

417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-1

No. Task Reference

2-2 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 417006-2301-0H3-A00

No. Task Reference

14 Depending on the modules in your XDM-100 shelf: Connecting Fibers and

417006-2301-0H3-A00 ECI Telecom Ltd. Proprietary 2-3

Parameter Compliance requirements